System Hardware Manual - Nycomm Holding Page

System Hardware Manual - Nycomm Holding Page
System Hardware Manual
Issue 5.0 October 2011
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Regulatory
Chapter 1 Introduction to SV8100
Section 1
General Information .................................................................... 1-1
Section 2
Equipment List ............................................................................ 1-4
Chapter 2 SV8100 System Specifications
Section 1 General Information ..................................................................... 2-1
Section 2
System Block Diagram ................................................................ 2-1
Section 3
Maximum System Capacities .................................................... 2-5
3.1
System Configuration – SV8100 ................................................. 2-6
Section 4
Power-Based Calculator Chart ................................................. 2-13
Section 5
System Requirements and Specifications .............................. 2-17
5.1
Cabling ...................................................................................... 2-17
5.2
Power Requirements ................................................................. 2-20
5.3
5.2.1
Power Supply Specifications .................................................... 2-20
5.2.2
Power Supply Consumption ..................................................... 2-21
Environmental Conditions .......................................................... 2-21
5.3.1
Temperature and Humidity ...................................................... 2-21
5.4
Outside Line Types .................................................................... 2-22
5.5
Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications .................. 2-22
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
i
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.6
5.5.1
Transmission ............................................................................2-22
5.5.2
Network ....................................................................................2-23
5.5.3
Control ......................................................................................2-23
5.5.4
Electra Elite IPK Terminals and Equipment .............................2-24
5.5.5
Series i Terminals ....................................................................2-25
Dialing Specifications .................................................................2-25
5.6.1
Dial Pulse Address Signaling ...................................................2-25
5.6.2
Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Address Signaling .............2-25
5.6.3
External Equipment Connection ...............................................2-26
5.6.4
Music Source for Music on Hold via Chassis ...........................2-26
5.6.5
Music Source for Station Background Music via ACI ...............2-26
5.6.6
External Paging (Audio) ...........................................................2-26
5.6.7
External Tone Ringer/Night Chime Output ...............................2-27
5.6.8
SMDR Output ...........................................................................2-27
5.6.9
PC Connection .........................................................................2-27
5.6.10 Relay Contact ...........................................................................2-27
5.7
5.8
Battery Backup ..........................................................................2-27
5.7.1
System Backup (Optional) .......................................................2-27
5.7.2
Memory Backup .......................................................................2-27
Weights and Dimensions ...........................................................2-28
Chapter 3 Installing the SV8100 Chassis
Section 1 General Information .................................................................... 3-1
Section 2
Installing the Chassis ................................................................. 3-1
2.1
Wall Mounting the 19” Chassis ....................................................3-4
2.1.1
2.2
CHS2U Chassis Wall Mount Installation ....................................3-4
Floor Mounting the 19” Chassis .................................................3-12
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
2.2.1
CHS2U Chassis Installation ..................................................... 3-12
2.2.2
Multiple CHS2U Chassis Installation ....................................... 3-14
Stand Mounting the 19” Chassis ............................................... 3-16
2.3.1
CHS2U Chassis Installation ..................................................... 3-16
2.3.2
Multiple CHS2U Chassis Installation ....................................... 3-19
2.4
Rack Mounting the 19” Chassis ................................................. 3-22
2.5
Wall Mounting the 9.5” Chassis ................................................. 3-24
2.5.1
Option 1 ................................................................................... 3-25
2.5.2
Option 2 ................................................................................... 3-30
2.6
Stand Mounting the 9.5” Chassis .............................................. 3-36
2.7
Installing the 19” Chassis .......................................................... 3-39
2.7.1
Unpacking the Equipment ........................................................ 3-40
2.7.2
Before Installation .................................................................... 3-40
2.7.3
Installing the 19” Controlling Chassis ....................................... 3-41
2.7.4
Installing Expansion Blades in the 19” Chassis (Optional) ...... 3-42
2.7.4.1
Connector Pin-Out on the PZ-BS10/PZ-BS11 ....................3-43
2.7.4.2
Install the PZ-BS10 Expansion Base Blade in the CHS2U Controlling Chassis 3-43
2.7.4.3
Install the PZ-BS11 Expansion Blade in the CHS2U Expansion
Chassis 3-46
2.7.4.4
Connect the Controlling and Expansion Chassis ...............3-50
2.7.5
Install 19” Chassis Grounding .................................................. 3-52
2.7.6
Install 19” Grounding on Multiple Chassis (Optional) ............... 3-52
2.7.7
Install AC Power Cords ............................................................ 3-53
2.7.8
Install AC Power Cords on Multiple-Chassis (Optional) ........... 3-54
2.7.9
Install Additional Blades ........................................................... 3-54
2.7.10 Apply Power to the 19” Chassis ............................................... 3-54
2.8
Installing the 9.5” Chassis ......................................................... 3-54
2.8.1
Install AC Power Cord 9.5” Chassis ......................................... 3-55
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
- iii
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 3
Install Additional Blades 9.5” Chassis ......................................3-55
2.8.3
Apply Power to the 9.5” Chassis ..............................................3-55
Battery Connection ................................................................... 3-56
3.1
Installing the Internal Batteries ..................................................3-56
3.2
Installing the External Batteries .................................................3-62
3.3
Section 4
2.8.2
3.2.1
Floor Mounting the CHS LARGE BATT BOX ...........................3-62
3.2.2
Battery Installation ....................................................................3-64
3.2.3
CHS LARGE BATT BOX to CHS2U Connection .....................3-68
Installing the External Batteries 9.5” Chassis ............................3-72
3.3.1
Battery Installation ....................................................................3-72
3.3.2
CHSGW SMALL BATT BOX to CHS2U GW Connection ........3-74
3.3.3
CHSGW SMALL BATT BOX Fuse Replacement .....................3-75
Remove and Install Cooling Fan .............................................. 3-77
4.1
CHS2U Chassis .........................................................................3-77
4.1.1
Remove Cooling Fan
............................................................3-77
4.1.2
Install Cooling Fan ...................................................................3-79
Chapter 4 Installing the SV8100 Blades
Section 1 General Information .................................................................... 4-1
1.1
Section 2
Slot Locations ..............................................................................4-1
Installation .................................................................................. 4-3
2.1
Installation and Safety Precautions .............................................4-3
2.2
Installing an Extension or Trunk Blade ........................................4-4
2.2.1
Installing the Blades ...................................................................4-4
2.2.2
Order of Installing Extension Blades ..........................................4-5
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.3
2.2.3.1
Installing CD-4COTA, CD-4DIOPB, CD-4ODTB or CD-2BRIA
blades 4-6
2.2.3.2
Installing CD-PRTA (T1/PRI) Blades ....................................4-8
2.3
Remove an Extension or Trunk Blade ......................................... 4-8
2.4
Uninstalling a Blade Slot Through Software ................................ 4-8
2.5
Blade Capacities .......................................................................... 4-9
2.6
Powering Up the SV8100 ............................................................ 4-9
2.6.1
Performing a Cold Start ............................................................. 4-9
2.6.2
Performing a Hot Start ............................................................. 4-10
2.6.3
Resetting the System ............................................................... 4-10
2.6.4
Section 3
Order of Installing Trunk Blades ................................................ 4-6
2.6.3.1
Initial Programming .............................................................4-10
2.6.3.2
Port Defaults .......................................................................4-11
2.6.3.3
Setting Up Extension Circuit Types ....................................4-11
2.6.3.4
Saving Your Configuration ..................................................4-12
2.6.3.5
Backing Up/Restoring a Database .....................................4-12
Performing a Software Upgrade .............................................. 4-13
Common Control Blades ..........................................................4-16
3.1
3.2
3.3
CD-CP00 (SV8100 Central Processing Unit) ............................ 4-16
3.1.1
Description ............................................................................... 4-17
3.1.2
Installation ................................................................................ 4-20
3.1.3
Switch Settings ........................................................................ 4-22
3.1.4
LED Indications ........................................................................ 4-22
3.1.5
Connectors ............................................................................... 4-24
PZ-ME50 (Memory Expansion Daughter Board) ....................... 4-27
3.2.1
Description ............................................................................... 4-27
3.2.2
Installation ................................................................................ 4-28
PZ-VM21 (Voice Mail Daughter Board inc. V34 modem) ......... 4-30
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
-v
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.4
3.5
Section 4
3.3.1
Description ...............................................................................4-30
3.3.2
Installation ................................................................................4-31
3.3.3
Switch Settings .........................................................................4-33
3.3.4
Remote PC Programming access ............................................4-33
PZ-32IPLA/PZ-64IPLA/PZ-128IPLA (Voice over IP Daughter
Boards) 4-33
3.4.1
Description ...............................................................................4-35
3.4.2
Installation ................................................................................4-36
3.4.3
Switch Settings .........................................................................4-36
3.4.4
LED Indications ........................................................................4-37
3.4.5
Connectors ...............................................................................4-38
PZ-32IPLB/PZ-64IPLB/PZ-128IPLB (Voice over IP Daughter
Boards) - (Available June 2011) 4-39
3.5.1
Description ...............................................................................4-39
3.5.2
Installation ................................................................................4-40
3.5.3
Switch Settings .........................................................................4-40
3.5.4
LED Indications ........................................................................4-40
3.5.5
Connectors ...............................................................................4-42
Station Blades ........................................................................... 4-44
4.1
4.2
CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA (Digital Station Interface) ..................4-44
4.1.1
Description ...............................................................................4-45
4.1.2
Installation ................................................................................4-46
4.1.3
LED Indications ........................................................................4-46
4.1.4
Connectors ...............................................................................4-47
PZ-8DLCB (Digital Station Daughter Board) .............................4-49
4.2.1
Description ...............................................................................4-49
4.2.2
Installation ................................................................................4-50
4.2.3
PZ-8DLCB Daughter Board Cable Connection ........................4-50
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.3
4.4
4.5
Section 5
CD-4LCA/ CD-8LCA (4-Port/8-Port Single Line Interface) ........ 4-52
4.3.1
Description ............................................................................... 4-53
4.3.2
Installation ................................................................................ 4-55
4.3.3
LED Indications ........................................................................ 4-55
4.3.4
Connectors ............................................................................... 4-57
PZ-4LCA/PZ-8LCE (4-Port/8-Port SLI Daughter Boards) ......... 4-58
4.4.1
Description ............................................................................... 4-60
4.4.2
Installation ................................................................................ 4-61
4.4.3
Connectors ............................................................................... 4-62
CD-LTA (Dterm/SLT Combination) ............................................. 4-63
4.5.1
Description ............................................................................... 4-63
4.5.2
Installation ................................................................................ 4-64
4.5.3
LED Indications ........................................................................ 4-65
4.5.4
Connectors ............................................................................... 4-66
Trunk Blades .............................................................................. 4-67
5.1
5.2
5.3
CD-4COTA (4 Loop Start Interface) .......................................... 4-67
5.1.1
Description ............................................................................... 4-67
5.1.2
Installation ................................................................................ 4-69
5.1.3
LED Indications ........................................................................ 4-69
5.1.4
Connectors ............................................................................... 4-70
PZ-4COTE (4 Loop Start Interface Daughter Board) ................ 4-71
5.2.1
Description ............................................................................... 4-71
5.2.2
Installation ................................................................................ 4-73
5.2.3
Connectors ............................................................................... 4-73
CD-2BRIA (2 Basic Rate Interface) ........................................... 4-75
5.3.1
Description ............................................................................... 4-75
5.3.2
Installation ................................................................................ 4-76
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
- vii
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
Section 6
5.3.3
LED Indications ........................................................................4-77
5.3.4
Connectors ...............................................................................4-78
5.3.5
Termination Switch Settings .....................................................4-78
PZ-2BRIA (2 Basic Rate Interface Daughter Board) .................4-80
5.4.1
Description ...............................................................................4-81
5.4.2
Installation ................................................................................4-81
5.4.3
Connectors ...............................................................................4-82
5.4.4
Termination Switch Settings .....................................................4-83
CD-4DIOPB (DID/OPX Interface) ..............................................4-84
5.5.1
Description ...............................................................................4-84
5.5.2
Installation ................................................................................4-85
5.5.3
LED Indications ........................................................................4-85
5.5.4
Connectors ...............................................................................4-86
CD-PRTA (PRI Interface) .........................................................4-87
5.6.1
Description ...............................................................................4-87
5.6.2
Installation ................................................................................4-88
5.6.3
LED Indications ........................................................................4-90
5.6.4
Connectors ...............................................................................4-92
CD-4ODTB (4-Port Tie Line Interface Blade) ............................4-94
5.7.1
Description ...............................................................................4-94
5.7.2
Installation ................................................................................4-95
5.7.3
LED Indications ........................................................................4-96
5.7.4
Connectors ...............................................................................4-96
5.7.5
Connections .............................................................................4-98
Optional Blades ....................................................................... 4-100
6.1
CD-PVAA (Conference Bridge) (Future Enhancement) ..........4-100
6.1.1
Description .............................................................................4-100
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.2
6.3
6.1.2
Installation .............................................................................. 4-101
6.1.3
Switch Settings ...................................................................... 4-101
6.1.4
LED Indications ...................................................................... 4-101
6.1.5
Connectors ............................................................................. 4-102
CD-RTB (4-Port ) ..................................................................... 4-103
6.2.1
Description ............................................................................. 4-103
6.2.2
Installation .............................................................................. 4-105
6.2.3
LED Indications ...................................................................... 4-105
CD-ETIA (Gigabit PoE Switch) ................................................ 4-106
6.3.1
Description ............................................................................. 4-106
6.3.2
Installation .............................................................................. 4-107
6.3.2.1
Stacking Architecture ........................................................4-107
6.3.2.2
CD-CP00IP Address Assignment .....................................4-108
6.3.2.3
Group Formation ..............................................................4-108
6.3.2.4
Port Number Determination ..............................................4-108
6.3.2.5
Unmanaged Switch Functions ..........................................4-109
6.3.3
LED Indications ...................................................................... 4-109
6.3.4
Connectors ............................................................................. 4-109
Chapter 5 Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP
Multiline Terminals
Section 1
General Description .................................................................... 5-1
Section 2
DT300 Series Digital Multiline Terminals .................................. 5-7
2.1
Digital MultilineTerminals ............................................................. 5-7
2.1.1
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL .................................................................... 5-7
2.1.2
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL ................................................................. 5-8
2.1.3
DTL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL/DTL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL .............................. 5-8
2.1.4
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL ............................................................... 5-9
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
- ix
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 3
DTL-12D-1 (BK) TEL/DTL-12D-1 (WH) TEL ............................5-10
2.1.6
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL .............................................................5-11
2.1.7
DTL-24D-1 (BK) TEL/DTL-24D-1 (WH) TEL ............................5-12
2.1.8
DTL-32D-1 (BK) TEL/DTL-32D-1 (WH) TEL ............................5-13
DT700 Series IP Multiline Terminals ........................................ 5-15
3.1
Section 4
2.1.5
IP MultilineTerminals .................................................................5-15
3.1.1
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL ...................................................................5-15
3.1.2
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL .................................................................5-16
3.1.3
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL ...............................................................5-16
3.1.4
ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL ...............................5-17
3.1.5
ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL ...............................5-18
3.1.6
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL ...............................................................5-19
3.1.7
ITL-24D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-24D-1 (WH) TEL ...............................5-20
3.1.8
ITL-32D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-32D-1 (WH) TEL ...............................5-21
3.1.9
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL ...............................................................5-22
Install Multiline Terminals ........................................................ 5-24
4.1
Connecting the DT300 Series Multiline Terminal to the System 5-24
4.2
Applying Power to the DT700 Multiline Terminals .....................5-25
4.3
Connecting the IP Multiline Terminal to the Network and PC ....5-26
4.4
Adjusting the LCD on the Multiline Terminal ..............................5-27
4.5
Installing Line Key Kit (12LK-L KIT) ...........................................5-28
4.6
4.5.1
Installing the 12LK-L KIT ..........................................................5-28
4.5.2
Configuring the Digital Telephone for the Correct Number of Line
Keys 5-32
4.5.3
Configuring the IP Telephone for the Correct Number of Line Keys
5-32
Installing the Directory Card on the Multiline Terminal ..............5-34
___________________________________________________________________________________
x
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.7
Installing a Numbered Keypad on the Multiline Terminal .......... 5-35
4.7.1
Installing the Numbered Keypad on a Multiline Terminal ........ 5-37
4.7.2
Configuring the Digital Telephone for the Numbered Keypad . 5-39
4.7.3
Configuring the IP Telephone for the Numbered Keypad ........ 5-39
4.8
Adjusting the Height on the Multiline Terminal .......................... 5-41
4.9
Removing or Installing the Tilt Legs on the Multiline Terminal .. 5-42
4.9.1
Remove Tilt Legs ..................................................................... 5-42
4.9.2
Install Tilt Legs ......................................................................... 5-43
4.10 Wall Mounting the Multiline Terminal ......................................... 5-45
4.10.1 Wall Mounting a Multiline Terminal using the Base Plate ........ 5-45
4.10.1.1 Adjusting the Hanger Hook .................................................5-45
4.10.1.2 Wall Mounting the Multiline Terminal ..................................5-46
4.10.1.3 Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Wall Mounted Base
Plate. 5-47
4.10.1.4 Wall Mounting the Base on a Switch Box ...........................5-48
Section 5
Multiline Terminals Optional Equipment ................................. 5-49
5.1
DT300/DT700 Series Terminal Options .................................... 5-49
5.2
DT300/DT700 Series Optional Terminal Equipment ................. 5-50
5.2.1
8LK-L (BK) UNIT/8LK-L (WH) UNIT ........................................ 5-50
5.2.1.1
5.2.2
8LKD (LD)-L (BK) UNIT/8LKD (LD)-L (WH) UNIT ................... 5-52
5.2.2.1
5.2.3
Installing the 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT .........................................5-53
8LKI (LD)-L (BK) UNIT/8LKI (LD)-L (WH) UNIT ...................... 5-56
5.2.3.1
5.2.4
Installing the 8LK-L UNIT ...................................................5-50
Installing the 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT ..........................................5-57
DCL-60-1 (BK) CONSOLE/DCL-60-1 (WH) CONSOLE ......... 5-60
5.2.4.1
Installing the DCL-60-1 CONSOLE ....................................5-61
5.2.5
LCD (BL)-L (BK) UNIT/LCD (BL)-L (WH) UNIT ....................... 5-65
5.2.6
PANEL( )-L UNIT .................................................................... 5-66
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
- xi
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.2.7
WM-L UNIT Attached to Wall ...................................................5-66
5.2.8
Release the WM-L UNIT ..........................................................5-68
5.2.9
WM-L UNIT Attached to Wall Plate ..........................................5-69
5.2.10 Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Wall Mounted Plate. .....
5-71
Section 6
Section 7
Section 8
Optional Handsets .................................................................... 5-72
6.1
ITL / DTL PTM Handset .............................................................5-72
6.2
ITL / DTL PTT Handset ..............................................................5-72
6.3
UTR-1-1 USB Handset ..............................................................5-73
6.3.1
Handset Connection .................................................................5-73
6.3.2
USB Connection .......................................................................5-73
6.3.3
Wall Mounting ..........................................................................5-74
Bluetooth Cordless Handset .................................................... 5-75
7.1
Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH) Interface ............................5-75
7.2
Selecting a Location ..................................................................5-76
7.3
Controls and Indicators ..............................................................5-77
7.4
Installing the Bluetooth Cordless Handset .................................5-79
7.4.1
Installing the Bluetooth Handset Cradle ...................................5-79
7.4.2
Wall Mounting the Bluetooth Cradle .........................................5-85
7.4.3
Remove and Replace Handset Battery ....................................5-88
Bluetooth Hub Adapter ............................................................. 5-89
8.1
Bluetooth Hub Adapter (BHA) Features ....................................5-89
8.1.1
Installing the BHA-L UNIT ........................................................5-89
8.1.2
Pairing a Bluetooth Device and Multiline Terminal (Bluetooth Installed) 5-91
8.1.2.1
Accessing the Bluetooth Device Setup Screen .................. 5-91
8.1.2.2
Entering a PIN Code .......................................................... 5-91
___________________________________________________________________________________
xii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 9
8.1.2.3
Pairing ................................................................................5-91
8.1.2.4
Connecting the Paired Device ............................................5-92
8.1.2.5
Unpairing ............................................................................5-92
8.1.2.6
Visibility Setting ..................................................................5-92
8.1.2.7
BT Information ....................................................................5-93
Single Line Telephone .............................................................. 5-94
9.1
Installing the SLT Adapter ......................................................... 5-94
9.2
Wall-Mounting the SLT Adapter ................................................ 5-95
Chapter 6 Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
Section 1
General Information .................................................................... 6-1
Section 2
PGD(2)-U10 ADP .......................................................................... 6-1
Section 3
2.1
Using a PGD(2)-U10 ADP ........................................................... 6-1
2.2
LED Indications ........................................................................... 6-2
2.3
Setting up PGD(2)-U10 ADP Connections .................................. 6-2
Background Music .................................................................... 6-10
3.1
Section 4
Door Box .................................................................................... 6-11
4.1
Section 5
Section 6
Installing Background Music ...................................................... 6-10
Installing a Door Box ................................................................. 6-11
External Paging ......................................................................... 6-15
5.1
External Page ............................................................................ 6-15
5.2
Installing an External Page System ........................................... 6-15
External Paging and Door Box/Page Relays ........................... 6-17
6.1
External Page Relays ................................................................ 6-17
6.2
Door Box /External Page Relay Contacts .................................. 6-18
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
- xiii
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.2.1
Section 7
Section 8
Section 9
Connecting a Contact Relay Device to a Door Box/External Page
Relay 6-18
External Recording System/External Ringer .......................... 6-19
7.1
External Recording System or External Ringer .........................6-19
7.2
Installing an External Recording System or External Ringer .....6-20
7.3
Programming .............................................................................6-21
Music Sources ........................................................................... 6-24
8.1
Music on Hold ............................................................................6-24
8.2
Installing External Music on Hold ...............................................6-24
Night Mode Selection ................................................................ 6-27
9.1
Night Mode Selector Switch .......................................................6-27
9.2
Connecting a Night Mode Selector Switch ................................6-27
Section 10 Telephone Labeling .................................................................. 6-27
10.1 DESI Printer Sheets ...................................................................6-27
10.1.1 Removing the Faceplate ..........................................................6-28
10.1.2 Replacing the Faceplate ..........................................................6-28
Section 11 Telephone Adapters .................................................................. 6-29
11.1 Using Adapters ..........................................................................6-29
11.2 In-line Power Adapter (ILPA-R) .................................................6-29
11.2.1 Conditions ................................................................................6-30
11.2.2 Installation ................................................................................6-31
11.3 ADA-L UNIT ...............................................................................6-33
11.3.1 ADA-L UNIT Switch Settings ....................................................6-34
11.3.2 Installing the ADA-L UNIT ........................................................6-35
11.3.3 ADA-L UNIT Connection ..........................................................6-37
___________________________________________________________________________________
xiv
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
11.3.3.1 ADA-L UNIT Connection for Recording Only .....................6-37
11.3.3.2 ADA-L UNIT Connection for Sending Recorded Calls to the
Telephone 6-38
11.4 APR-L UNIT ............................................................................... 6-38
11.4.1 APR-L UNIT Switch Settings ................................................... 6-39
11.4.2 Installing the APR-L UNIT ........................................................ 6-40
11.5 PSA-L (BK) UNIT / PSA-L (WH) UNIT ...................................... 6-43
11.5.1 Installing the PSA-L Adapter .................................................... 6-44
11.5.2 Using the PSA-L Adapter ......................................................... 6-50
11.6 Gigabit Adapter (GBA-L UNIT) .................................................. 6-51
11.6.1 Installing the GBA-L UNIT ........................................................ 6-52
11.6.2 GBA-L UNIT Connection .......................................................... 6-60
11.6.3 LED Display ............................................................................. 6-60
Section 12 Power Failure Telephones ........................................................ 6-61
12.1 Power Failure ............................................................................ 6-61
12.2 Connector Pin-Outs on COIU Blade for Power Failure Circuits 6-62
12.3 Installing the Power Failure Telephones ................................... 6-62
___________________________________________________________________________________
System Hardware Manual
- xv
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
xvi
Table of Contents
Regulatory
BATTERY DISPOSAL
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of these
batteries, Chassis, and/or Blades, you must comply with applicable regulations regarding proper
disposal procedures.
Table R-1 Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades
Unit Name
Type of Battery
Quantity
Lithium
1
CHS LARGE BATT SET
Sealed Lead
6
Internal Batteries
Sealed Lead
2
Bluetooth® Cordless Handset
Lithium-ion
1
G955 Wireless
Lithium-ion
1
Sealed Lead
2
Lithium-ion
1
CD-CP00
CHSGW SMALL BATT SET
MH240 Wireless
The UNIVERGE SV8100 CD-CP00 provides memory backup for approximately three years. The
Lithium battery should be replaced every two years.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN YOUR REGULAR WASTE! THE PRODUCT YOU
PURCHASED CONTAINS LITHIUM, NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES. LITHIUM,
NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES MUST BE COLLECTED, RECYCLED, OR
DISPOSED OF IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY SOUND MANNER.
System Hardware Manual
R-1
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The incineration, landfilling or mixing of nickel-cadmium or sealed lead batteries with the municipal solid
waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas. Contact your local solid waste management
officials for other information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling, and disposal of
the battery.
Nickel-Cadmium (or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to an approved nickel-cadmium (or sealed
lead) battery recycler. This may be where the batteries were originally sold or a local seller of automotive
batteries. Contact your local waste management officials for other information regarding the
environmentally sound collection, recycling and disposal of the battery contained in this product.
The packaging for the UNIVERGE SV8100 system contains the following labels regarding proper
disposal.
PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING
CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY.
BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR
DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT BE
DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-Cd
CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.
BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Pb
CONTAINS NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE
BATTERY. BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED
OR DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-MH
R-2
Regulatory
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
EUROPEAN UNION INFORMATION
Notice to the user
The system described in this manual is intended to be connected to analog and digital networks and
supports a wide range of peripheral equipment. The following interfaces are available for connection to
public analog and digital telecommunication networks:
z
TBR3
ISDN basic rate interface
z
TBR4
ISDN primary rate interface
z
ES203-021 Analogue interface
To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment, the country or network
specific features should match the supported features of the system. For an overview of the supported
features, refer to the detailed documentation that comes with this system, contact your local NEC
representative or the support desk of NEC Unified Solutions.
Declaration of conformity
Hereby, “NEC Unified Solutions”, declares that the SV8100 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Electromagnetic Compatibility
For the SV8100 system the following warning is applicable:
Warning
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
System Hardware Manual
R-3
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION
For Countries in the European Union
The symbol depicted here has been affixed to your product in order to inform
you that electrical and electronic products should not be disposed of as
municipal waste.
Electrical and electronic products including the cables, plugs and accessories
should be disposed of separately in order to allow proper treatment, recovery
and recycling. These products should be taken to a designated facility where
the best available treatment, recovery and recycling techniques are available.
Separate disposal has significant advantages: valuable materials can be reused and it prevents the dispersion of unwanted substances into the municipal
waste stream. This contributes to the protection of human health and the
environment.
Please be informed that a fine may be imposed for illegal disposal of electrical
and electronic products via the general municipal waste stream.
In order to facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements have been
made for local collection and recycling. In case your electrical and electronic products need to be
disposed of please refer to your supplier or the contractual agreements that your company has made
upon acquisition of these products.
At www.nec-unified.com/weee you can find information about separate disposal and environmentally
sound recycling.
Battery information
Defective or exhausted batteries should never be disposed of as municipal waste. Return old batteries to
the battery supplier, a licensed battery dealer or a designated collection facility. Do not incinerate
batteries. This product uses Lithium batteries. Do not use any other type.
For an overview of the location of batteries used in these systems, the battery replacement or removal
instructions, please refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual.
R-4
Regulatory
Introduction to SV8100
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The SV8100 is a full-featured IP based communications system providing
a rich feature set of existing system, with pure Voice over IP (VoIP)
communications, across corporate Local and Wide Area Networks (LAN
and WAN).
The DT700 series telephones provide a converged infrastructure at the
desktop, with a 10Base-T/100Base-TX connection to the LAN and built-in
hub for a PC connection to the telephone itself. The system can provide
peer-to-peer connections between the DT700 series telephones with voice
compression, offering existing IP telephone features with an enhanced
user interface. On the WAN side, the system can provide peer-to-peer
connections over IP networks with the voice compression on CCIS over IP.
Chapter
1
The SV8100 can provide legacy line/trunk interfaces to support the
existing Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) based infrastructure, such as
analog telephones, digital telephones (DT300 series), analog networks
and digital networks (T1/E1, ISDN, etc.).
The new compact 19” chassis provides 104 total ports (80 digital
terminals) and can be expanded, using three additional 19” chassis, for a
maximum of 416 ports (368 digital terminals). Through IP connection and
four additional 19” chassis, the system can be expanded to a maximum of
512 ports for SV8100 and a maximum of 1024 for SV8300 (refer to Table
2-2 SV8100 Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels on
page 2-5).
Communications between legacy stations/trunks and DT700 series
telephones/IP networks are made using a VoIP daughter board, which
converts packet-based voice data to TDM-based voice data, and vice
versa. Both peer-to-peer connections and TDM-based connections are
controlled by the CPU blade. The CPU incorporates a built-in Device
Registration Server (DRS) and a single interface point of IP connection to
IP telephone, PCPro and OAI / ACD servers. Figure 1-1 shows a simplified
view of SV8100 system connectivity.
System Hardware Manual
1-1
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 1-1 Simplified SV8100 System Connectivity
Highlights of the UNIVERGE SV8100 are as follows:
z
Pure IP System capable TDM configuration
The SV8100 supports both pure IP switching (peer-to-peer connections) and
Time Division Switching. The pure IP switching is provided for communications
between DT700 series telephones and for CCIS / Remote Unit connections with
other SV8100. On the other hand, the TDM switching is provided for
communications between legacy stations/trunks. Connection between IP
network and legacy network is made via VoIP daughter board on the CPU
blade, which converts packet-based voice data to TDM-based voice data, and
vice versa.
z
Powerful CPU Blade with Built-in Functionalities
The CPU blade of SV8100 is a heart of pure IP connections and TDM-based
connections. The CPU blade employs a 32 bit microprocessor. With this
processing power and DSP technology, it integrates the following functions on
one board. These functions are managed with software licenses.
1-2
Š
DTMF receivers
Š
Caller ID receivers
Š
Caller ID senders
Introduction to SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
MF senders / receivers
Š
10/100 Ethernet Port
Š
2 Control Relays
Š
MOH Input Port
Š
Paging Output Port
Š
In-Mail (VMDB)
Š
VoIP.
In addition, by means of advanced LSI technology, size of the CPU blade is
minimized, O&M NIC port (10/100M) is built in and VoIPDB which has VoIP NIC
port (Gigabit Ethernet) is mountable without additional slots in the chassis. The
O&M NIC port is linked with LAN/WAN for inter-work with PCPro, SMDR, OAI
server, and the VoIP NIC port is linked with LAN/WAN for control signaling and
voice signaling (RTP) for DT700 series.
z
High Density Legacy Line/Trunk Blades
Major legacy line/trunk blades used in SV8100 are provided with main blade +
daughter blade architecture. When the main blade is mounted only in an initial
supply, line/trunk interfaces can be easily expanded by adding the daughter
blade. The maximum number of ports for the line/trunk blades is 8/16 ports with
daughter blade, respectively. This allows the physical system size to be
compact.
z
Universal Blade Slot (19” Chassis)
A 19” Chassis is used for legacy line/trunk blades. One 19” Chassis provides six
universal slots and one expansion slot. Also, the universal slots can be used for
special application blades without complicated limitation. This makes easy
quotation and installation.
z
Easy Installation (Front Cabling and Enhanced O&M Tool)
Cable connectors (RJ-45 or RJ-61) are located on the front panel of each
chassis and blade. This increases efficiency of the cabling work. Also, PCPro
provides an enhanced user interface. A Quick Setup tool provides easy setup
(system data programming) for a basic system configuration in shorter time.
System Hardware Manual
1-3
Issue 5.0
SECTION 2
UNIVERGE SV8100
EQUIPMENT LIST
The following tables list all equipment for the SV8100 systems.
Table 1-1 Chassis Equipment List
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
Product Code
CHS2U
19” Chassis (6-slot)
SV8100
CHS2U GW
9.5” Chassis (3-slot)
SV8100
MPS7101
Power Supply Unit for 19” Chassis (2U)
SV8100
Table 1-2 Chassis Installation Equipment List
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
Product Code
CHS2U BLANK SLOT COVER Blank Slot Cover Set
KIT
SV8100
CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT Upper Joint Bracket for 6-slot Chassis
SV8100
CHS2U RACK MOUNT KIT
SV8100
Rack Mount for CHS2U Chassis
CHS1U/2U WALL MOUNT KIT Wall Mount Set for CHS2U Chassis
SV8100
CHS Stand Kit (K)
SV8100
Stand Mount Kit for 2U Chassis
Table 1-3 Battery Mount Equipment List
Equipment Name
1-4
Equipment Description
Product Code
CHS1U BATT MTG KIT-A
Built-in Battery Mount Kit (for 1U Chassis)
for GS Yuasa PE12V-0.8 batteris (AMP
connectors) or GS Yuasa NP0.8-12
batteries (JST connectors)
SV8100
CHS1U BATT CA INT KIT
(GS-NP)
Cable set for internal battery
SV8100
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
Long Term Battery Box for CHS1U and
CHS2U Chassis
SV8100
CHS BATT CA EXT-A
Cable set for external battery
SV8100
CHS2U BATT MTG KIT
Battery Mount for CHS2U Chassis
SV8100
Introduction to SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 1-4 Blade Equipment List
Equipment Name Abbreviations
Equipment Description
Product Code
CD-CP00
CPU
Main Processor Blade for KTS
SV8100
PZ-BS10
BUS0
Expansion Chassis Interface Unit, 3-jack
SV8100
PZ-BS11
BUS1
Expansion Chassis Interface Unit, 1-jack
SV8100
PZ-VM21
VMDB
16 Channels for Voice Mail with a Single
Channel V34 Modem
SV8100
PZ-32IPLA
VoIPDB
32-channel VOIP on CCPU
SV8100
PZ-64IPLA
VoIPDB
64-channel VOIP on CCPU
SV8100
PZ-128IPLA
VoIPDB
128-channel VOIP on CCPU
SV8100
CD-8DLCA
DLC
8-port Digital Station Interface
SV8100
PZ-8DLCB
DLCDB
8-port Digital Station Interface on
CD-8DLCA
SV8100
CD-16DLCA
DLC
16-port Digital Station Interface
SV8100
CD-4COTA
COT
4-port Loop Start Trunks
SV8100
PZ-4COTE
COTDB
4-port Loop Start Trunks on CD-4COTA
SV8100
CD-4LCA
LC
4-port Single Line Telephone Interface
SV8100
PZ-4LCA
LCDB
4-port Single Line Telephone Interface on
CD-4LCA and CD-8LCA
SV8100
CD-8LCA
LC
8-port Single Line Telephone Interface
SV8100
PZ-8LCE
LCDB
8-port Single Line Telephone Interface on
CD-4LCA and CD-8LCA
SV8100
CD-2BRIA
BRT
2 Basic Rate Interface
SV8100
PZ-2BRIA
BRTDB
2 Basic Rate Interface on CD-2BRIA
SV8100
CD-PRTA
PRT
1 Primary Rate Interface
SV8100
CD-4DIOPB
DIOP
4 DID/OPX
SV8100
CD-4ODTA
ODT
4-port Tie Line Interface (E&M)
SV8100
CD-RTB
RTB
Router (Future)
SV8100
CD-ETIA
GSWU
PoE Gigabit Switch Unit
SV8100
PZ-ME50
MEM
Memory Expansion on CD-CP00
SV8100
CD-LTA
LTA
8 Digital Station/2SLT for CD-CP00 only
SV8100
CD-PVAA
CNF
Packet Voice Application (Future)
SV8100
System Hardware Manual
1-5
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 1-5 Cable Equipment List
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
Product Code
RS CONSOLE CA-A
MAT (PCPro) Cable 6.6 ft. (2.0m)
SV8100
RS NORM-4S CA-F
RS-232C Cable (normal) 13.1 ft (4m)
SV8100
RS RVS-15S CA-F
RS-232C Cable (reverse) 49.2 ft (15.0m)
SV8100
RS RVS-4S CA-F
RS 232C Cable (reverse) 13.1 ft (4.0m)
SV8100
RS RVS-4S CA-G
RS 232C Cable (reverse) 13.1 ft (4.0m)
SV8100
RS PRT-15S CA-F
RS-232C Cable (printer) 49.2 ft (15.0m)
SV8100
BUS CABLE
Bus Cable
SV8100
AC CORD
AC Power Cable for US
SV8100
CHS2U BATT CA INT
CHS2U Battery Cable for Internal Battery
SV8100
CHS2U BATT CA EXT-A
Battery Cable for External Battery 6-slot
Chassis
SV8100
Table 1-6 Digital Multiline Terminal (DT300 Series) Equipment List
Equipment Name
1-6
Equipment Description
Product Code
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
Economy Digital 2-button Telephone
(No-Display)
SV8100
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
Economy Digital 6-button Display
Telephone
SV8100
DTL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
Value Digital 12-button Display Telephone
SV8100
DTL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
Value Digital 24-button Display Telephone
SV8100
DTL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
Value Digital 32-button Display Telephone
SV8100
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
12D + BCH (Future)
SV8100
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
Value Digital 12-button Telephone with
Power Failure Adapter
SV8100
DTL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
Value Digital 8-button Telephone
(DESI-less)
SV8100
DCL-60-1 (BK) CONSOLE
DCL-60-1 (WH) CONSOLE
60-button Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Console
SV8100
Introduction to SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 1-6 Digital Multiline Terminal (DT300 Series) Equipment List (Continued)
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
Product Code
8LK-L (BK) UNIT
8LK-L (WH) UNIT
8-button Line Key Unit
SV8100
8LKD (LD)-L (BK) UNIT
8LKD (LD)-L (WH) UNIT
DESI-less 8-button Line Key Unit/LCD Unit
for Digital Telephone
SV8100
LCD (BL)-L (BK) UNIT
LCD (BL)-L (WH) UNIT
LCD Unit (Backloght LCD) for Digital
Telephone
SV8100
Table 1-7 IP Multiline Terminal (DT700 Series) Equipment List
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
Product Code
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
Economy IP 2-button Telephone (No
Display)
SV8100
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
Economy IP 6-button Display Telephone
SV8100
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
Economy IP 8-button Display Telephone
SV8100
ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
Value IP 12-button Display Telephone
SV8100
ITL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
Value IP 24-button Display Telephone
SV8100
ITL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
Value IP 32-button Display Telephone
SV8100
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
Value IP 12-button Telephone with Power
Failure Adapter
SV8100
ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
Value IP 8 Line Key Display Telephone
Value IP Telephone: DESI-less
SV8100
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
Sophisticated Telephone
SV8100
8LKI (LD)-L (BK) UNIT
8LKI (LD)-L (WH) UNIT
DESI-less LK/LCD Unit for IP
SV8100
Table 1-8 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
Product Code
APR-L UNIT
APR
SV8100
ADA-L UNIT
ADA
SV8100
BHA-L UNIT
Bluetooth® Hub Adapter
SV8100
System Hardware Manual
1-7
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 1-8 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Equipment Name
1-8
Equipment Description
Product Code
PSA-L (BK) UNIT
PSA-L (WH) UNIT
PSA
SV8100
BCH-L (BK) UNIT
Bluetooth Cordless Handset
SV8100
12LK-L (BK) KIT
12LK-L (WH) KIT
12-button Line Key Kit
SV8100
LCD (BL)-L (BK) UNIT
LCD (BL)-L (WH) UNIT
LCD Unit (No Backlight)
SV8100
WM-L UNIT
Wall Mount Unit
SV8100
60 DSS WM-L UNIT
Wall Mount Kit for DCL-60-1
SV8100
DESI ITL/DTL-2E (25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for Economy 2-button
Telephone (2 Labels per Sheet)
SV8100
DESI ITL/DTL-6DE (25 PKG) DESI Sheet for Economy 6-button Display
Telephone (2 Labels per Sheet)
SV8100
DESI ITL/DTL-12D (25 PKG) DESI Sheet for Value 12-button Display
Telephone (2 Labels per Sheet)
SV8100
DESI ITL/DTL-8LK (25 PKG) DESI Sheet for 8-button Line Key (2 Labels
per Sheet)
SV8100
DESI DCL-60 (25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for 60DSS (1 Label per Sheet)
SV8100
DESI ITL/DTL-SIDE(25
PKG)
DESI Sheet for Clear Side Panel (Left and
Right Label each Sheet)
SV8100
DESI ITL/DTL-SIDELCDV(25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for Value Telephone LCD
(Clear Side)
SV8100
DESI ITL/DTL-SIDELCDS(25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for Sophisticated Telephone
LCD (Clear Side)
SV8100
DESI ITL/DTL Directory Card Directory Card
SV8100
DESI ITL/DTL-24D (25 PKG) DESI Sheet for Value 24-button Display
Telephone (2 Labels per Sheet)
SV8100
Panel (Red-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Red)
SV8100
Panel (Red-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD
(Red)
SV8100
Panel (Red-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Sophisticated
Telephone LCD (Red)
SV8100
Panel (Blue-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Blue)
SV8100
Panel (Blue-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD
(Blue)
SV8100
Panel (Blue-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Sophisticated
Telephone LCD (Blue)
SV8100
Introduction to SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 1-8 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
Product Code
Panel (Silver-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Silver)
SV8100
Panel (Silver-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD
(Silver)
SV8100
Panel (Silver-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Sophisticated
Telephone LCD (Silver)
SV8100
Panel (Wood-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Wood)
SV8100
Panel (Wood-VLCD)-L UNIT Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD
(Wood)
SV8100
Panel (Wood-SLCD)-L UNIT Color Side Panel for Sophisticated
Telephone LCD (Wood)
SV8100
Panel( Logo-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Wood with
Logo)
SV8100
Panel (Clear-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Clear)
SV8100
LKPANEL(2BTN)-L (BK)
UNIT
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (2-button) (BK)
SV8100
LKPANEL(6BTN)-L (BK)
UNIT
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (6-button) (BK)
SV8100
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L (BK)
UNIT
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L (WH)
UNIT
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (12-button)
SV8100
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L (BK)
UNIT
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L (WH)
UNIT
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (24-button)
SV8100
LKPANEL(8BTN)-L (BK)
UNIT
LKPANEL(8BTN)-L (WH)
UNIT
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (8-button)
SV8100
LKPANEL(60BTN)-L (BK)
UNIT
LKPANEL(60BTN)-L (WH)
UNIT
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (60-button)
SV8100
DTL (Value)-Base-1 unit
Digital Base
SV8100
LCDD(S)-L (BK) UNIT
LCDD(S)-L (WH)) UNIT
Digital Standard Telephone LCD
SV8100
TENKEY(STD)-L SET
Standard 10-Key
SV8100
FNCKEY(STD)-L (BK) SET
FNCKEY(STD)-L (WH) SET
Standard Function Key
SV8100
System Hardware Manual
1-9
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 1-8 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Equipment Name
1 - 10
Equipment Description
Product Code
12LKSoft-L (BK) SET
12LKSoft-L (WH) SET
12LK without Soft Key
SV8100
12LK(STD)-L (BK) SET
12LK(STD)-L (WH) SET
12LK
SV8100
TKPANEL(STD)-L (BK) UNIT 10-Key Panel
TKPANEL(STD)-L (WH)
UNIT
SV8100
Cradle (STD)-L(BK)
Cradle (STD)-L(WH)
Cradle
SV8100
VAL DIRECTORY CARD
UNIT(L)
Directory Card Holder for Value Telephone
SV8100
ECO DIRECTORY CARD
UNIT(L)
Directory Card Holder for Economy
Telephone
SV8100
Panel (Clear-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD
(Clear)
SV8100
Panel (Clear-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Sophisticated
Telephone LCD (Clear)
SV8100
LKPANEL(16BTN)-L (BK)
UNIT
LKPANEL(16BTN)-L (WH)
UNIT
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (16-button)
SV8100
KeyKitPanel (Value) (BK)
Unit
KeyKitPanel (Value) (WH)
Unit
Spare Plastic Cover Key Kit for Value
Telephone
SV8100
KeyKitPanel (Retro) (BK)
Unit
KeyKitPanel (Retro) (WH)
Unit
Spare Plastic Cover Key Kit for Retro
Telephone
SV8100
KeyKitPanel (Sophi) (BK)
Unit
KeyKitPanel (Sophi) (WH)
Unit
Spare Plastic Cover Key Kit for
Sophisticated Telephone
SV8100
KeyKitPanel(V)-L (M-Blue)
Unit
Color face panel for Value (Metallic Blue)
1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
KeyKitPanel(V)-L
(GUNMETA) Unit
Color face panel for Value (GunMetallic)
1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
KeyKitPanel(V)-L
(L-Green-M) Unit
Color face panel for Value (Lime Green
Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
KeyKitPanel(V)-L
(Orange-M) Unit
Color face panel for Value (Orange
Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
Introduction to SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 1-8 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
Product Code
KeyKitPanel(V)-L
(D-Brown-M) Unit
Color face panel for Value (Dark Brown
Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(M-Blue) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value(
Metallic Blue) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(GUNMETA) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value
(GunMetallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(L-Green-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value (Lime
Green Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(Orange-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value
(Orange Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of
panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(D-Brown-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value (Dark
Brown Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(M-Blue) UNIT
Color LK panel (24button) for Value
(Metallic Blue) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(GUNMETA) UNIT
Color LK panel (24button) for Value
(GunMetallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(L-Green-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (24button) for Value (Lime
Green Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(Orange-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (24button) for Value
(Orange Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of
panels
SV8100
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(D-Brown-M) UNIT
Color LK panel(24button) for Value (Dark
Brown Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
SV8100
PANEL(Pink-Base)-L UNIT
Color side panel for Base (Pink)
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair
includes (1) left and (1) right panel
SV8100
PANEL(Pink-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color side panel for Value LCD (Pink)
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair
includes (1) left and (1) right panel
SV8100
PANEL(Pink-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color side panel for Sophi LCD (Pink)
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair
includes (1) left and (1) right panel
SV8100
PANEL(C Gold-Base)-L
UNIT
Color side panel for Base (Champagne
Gold) 1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A
pair includes (1) left and (1) right panel
SV8100
PANEL(C Gold-VLCD)-L
UNIT
Color side panel for Value LCD
(Champagne Gold) 1 set consist of 10 pair
of panels. A pair includes (1) left and (1)
right panel
SV8100
System Hardware Manual
1 - 11
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 1-8 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Equipment Name
1 - 12
Equipment Description
Product Code
PANEL(C Gold-SLCD)-L
UNIT
Color side panel for Sophi LCD
(Champagne Gold) 1 set consist of 10 pair
of panels. A pair includes (1) left and (1)
right panel
SV8100
PANEL(BIO-Base)-L UNIT
BIO side panel for Base
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair
includes (1) left and (1) right panel
SV8100
PANEL(BIO-VLCD)-L UNIT
BIO side panel for Value LCD
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair
includes (1) left and (1) right panel
SV8100
PANEL(BIO-SLCD)-L UNIT
BIO side panel for Sophi LCD
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair
includes (1) left and (1) right panel
SV8100
MH240
Wireless SIP Telephone
SV8100
BS (F)-L (BK) KIT
BS (F)-L (WH) KIT
French Keypad
SV8100
BS (S)-L (BK) KIT
BS (S)-L (WH) KIT
Spanish Keypad
SV8100
ITL-GigADP-1
Gigabit Adapter
SV8100
BS (ACD)-L (BK) KIT
BS (ACD)-L (WH) KIT
ACD Support Keypad
SV8100
BS (ICON)-L (BK) KIT
BS (ICON)-L (WH) KIT
ICON Support Keypad
SV8100
BS (Retro)-L (BK) KIT
BS (Retro)-L (WH) KIT
Retrofit Support Keypad
SV8100
BS (RetroCON)-L (BK) KIT
BS (RetroCON)-L (WH) KIT
Retrofit ICON Support Keypad
SV8100
BS (Braille)-L (BK) KIT
BS (Braille)-L (WH) KIT
Braille Support Keypad Stickers
SV8100
HANDSET(NARROW)-L
(BK) UNIT
HANDSET(NARROW)-L
(WH) UNIT
Spare Narrowband Handset
SV8100
HANDSET(WIDE)-L (BK)
UNIT
HANDSET(WIDE)-L (WH)
UNIT
Spare Wideband Handset
SV8100
HandsetCord(12FT)-L (BK)
SET
HandsetCord(12FT)-L (WH)
SET
Spare Handset Cord 12 Feet
SV8100
Introduction to SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 1-8 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Equipment Name
HandsetCord(25FT)-L (BK)
SET
HandsetCord(25FT)-L (WH)
SET
Equipment Description
Spare Handset Cord 25 Feet
Product Code
SV8100
HandsetHanger-L (BK) SET Spare Handset Hanger
HandsetHanger-L (WH) SET
SV8100
ITL (Value)-Base-1 unit
IP Base
SV8100
LCDI(S)-L (BK) UNIT
LCDI(S)-L (WH)) UNIT
IP LCD Unit (without Backlight)
SV8100
LineCord-L (BK) SET
Spare Line Cord (BK)
SV8100
ITL/DTL PTM Handset (BK)
Push to Mute Handset
SV8100
ITL/DTL PTT Handset (BK)
Push to Talk Handset
SV8100
GBA-L UNIT
Gigabit Adapter
SV8100
AC-L UNIT
AC Adapter for GBA-L UNIT
SV8100
BS(V-HOTEL)-L (BK) UNIT
Standard Hotel function keypad for Value
(BK) with Blank D/F panel
SV8100
BS(S-HOTEL)-L (BK) UNIT
Standard Hotel function keypad for Sophi
(BK) with Blank D/F panel
SV8100
C124 SIP DECT Handset
SIP DECT wireless handset
SV8100
G955 SIP DECT Handset
SIP DECT wireless handset
SV8100
System Hardware Manual
1 - 13
Issue 5.0
1 - 14
UNIVERGE SV8100
Introduction to SV8100
SV8100 System Specifications
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter provides detailed specifications for the SV8100 system
technician. The technician should review this information carefully before
installing the system.
SECTION 2
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 2-1 SV8100 System Block Diagram shows the Blades that can be
installed in the chassis and the number of channels supported when the
Blade is installed. Table 2-1 List of Abbreviations lists abbreviations used
in the diagram.
Chapter
2
Table 2-1 List of Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution
ADA
Analog Recording Adapter
APR
Analog Port Adapter (with ringer)
BCH
Bluetooth Cordless Handset
BHA
Bluetooth Hub Adapter
AUX IN/OUT
BGM/MOH Port (on CPU)
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
BRIDB
Expansion Basic Rate Interface Blade on BRI
BRT
Basic Rate Interface Blade/ISDN Terminal Interface Blade
BUS0
BUS Interface Blade (for 1U chassis)
BUS1
BUS Interface Blade (for 2U chassis)
CCT
CCIS Interface Blade
CF
Compact Flash
CFT
Conference Trunk (on CPU)
System Hardware Manual
2-1
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 List of Abbreviations (Continued)
Abbreviation
2-2
Description
CNF
Conference Bridge Blade (PVA)
CPU
Central Processing Unit
DID
Direct Inward Dialing
DIOP
DID/OPX Blade
DLC
Digital Multiline Terminal Interface Blade
DLCB
Expansion Digital Multiline Terminal Interface Blade on DLC
DRS
Device Registration Server (on CPU)
DSS
Direct Station Selection Console
DTI
Digital Trunk Interface
DTG
Digital Tone Generator (on CPU)
ETHERNET
Ethernet Port (on CPU)
FT1
Fractional T1
GSWU
Power over Ethernet Gigabit Switch
IDF
Intermediate Distribution Frame
IPT
IP Trunk (P2P CCIS) (on CPU)
ISDN
Integrated Service Digital Network
LAN
Local Area Network
LC
Single Line Telephone Interface Blade
LCDB
Expansion Single Line Telephone Interface Blade on LC
MDF
Main Distribution Frame
MEM
Main Memory (on CPU)
MIS
Management Information System
MOH
Music On Hold
OAI
Open Application Interface (on CPU)
ODT
Tie Line Interface Blade (2W/4W E&M)
OPX
Off-Premise Extension
PBR
PB Receiver (on CPU)
PBSND
PB Sender (on CPU)
PCPro
PC Programming
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 2-1 List of Abbreviations (Continued)
Abbreviation
System Hardware Manual
Description
PFT
Power Failure Transfer
PLO
Phase Locked Oscillator (on CPU)
PMS
Property Management System
PRI
Primary Rate Interface
PRT
Primary Rate Interface Blade
PS
Personal Station
PSA
PSTN Adapter (analog)
PVA
Packet Voice Application
RTB
Router Blade
SERIAL
Serial Port (on CPU)
SLT
Single Line Telephone
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording
TDSW
Time Division Switch (on CPU)
USB
Universal Serial Bus (on CPU)
VM00
UMS Blade Server Blade (SV8100 only)
VMDB
VMS Daughter Board with V34 Modem (SV8100 only)
VMS
Voice Mail System
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol
VoIPDB
VoIP Blade (on CPU)
VRS
Voice Response System
WAN
Wide Area Network
WebPro
Web-Based PC Programming
2-3
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 2-1 SV8100 System Block Diagram
2-4
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
MAXIMUM SYSTEM CAPACITIES
SECTION 3
The CHS2U is a compact 19” chassis that has six universal slots, one expansion slot
and one MPS7101 (power supply unit). When the CD-CP00 is installed in the first
CHS2U, it is referred to as the Controlling Chassis. Additional chassis, referred to as
Expansion Chassis, can be installed to increase the capacity of the system to meet
the customer’s business needs.
As Figure 2-3 19” Controlling and Expansion Chassis and Table 2-2 SV8100
Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels illustrate, the system can be
expanded from 104 ports to 512 ports by vertically stacking a maximum of three
additional chassis onto the controlling chassis. This provides a maximum of 24 slots
and 368 digital terminals. To obtain a the maximum port capacity of 512 ports, two
systems can be linked together via an IP connection.
The maximum slot and channel capacities are listed in Table 2-2 SV8100 Maximum
System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels.
Table 2-2 SV8100 Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels
9.5”
Chassis
Number of:
19” Chassis
System
Maximum
x1
(CPU + 2
Slots)
x1
(6 Slots)
Number of Timeslots
55
111
222
333
444
444
Number of TDM (Time Division
Multiplexing) Ports
48
104
208
312
416
416
Dterm (-48V)
32
80
176
272
368
SLT (-28V)
32
80
176
272
368
SLT (-48V)
8
20
44
68
92
DtermIP
x2
x3
X4
(12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots)
512
Total 512
512
512
SIP/WLAN
Analog Trunks (COT)
16
40
88
136
184
BRI
16
40
88
136
184
PRI
60
90
180
180
180
Total 200
IP Trunk (SIP)
System Hardware Manual
200
2-5
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-2 SV8100 Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels
9.5”
Chassis
Number of:
DTMF Receivers
19” Chassis
x1
(CPU + 2
Slots)
x1
(6 Slots)
32
32
x2
x3
X4
(12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots)
32
32
32
System
Maximum
96 *1
128
VoIP Channels
Voice Mail Channels on CPU
16 channels
1 channel
V90 Modem
*1 = An additional 64 DTMF receivers are available when the PZ-BS10 is installed
3.1
System Configuration – SV8100
The 9.5” chassis provides 48 total ports (32 digital terminals) and can include
any combination of stations and trunks below this number.
Please note: the 9.5” chassis cannot be expanded.
3 Slots
Figure 2-2 9.5” Chassis
The SV8100 19” chassis provides 104 total ports (96 digital terminals) and can
be expanded, using three additional 19” chassis, for a maximum of 416 ports
(368 digital terminals). Through IP connection and use of additional 19”
chassis, the system can be expanded to a maximum of 512 ports.
The 19” chassis consists of a controlling chassis (chassis with CPU blade),
and the ability to expand the system using expansion blades depending on
system configuration.
2-6
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
The 9.5” chassis graphics shown in the horizontal position
are for illustration purposes only. Actual positioning/
mounting must be vertical.
6 Slots
18 Slots
24 Slots
IP Connection
Figure 2-3 19” Controlling and Expansion Chassis
System Hardware Manual
2-7
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-3 Maximum System Capacities – Chassis shows the maximum number of
chassis and related equipment that can be installed in a system.
Table 2-3 Maximum System Capacities – Chassis
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
1
3
4
Virtual slot in
NetLink is limited to
maximum of 240
PZ-BS10
3-jack Expansion Board for
Controlling Chassis
1
0
0
–
PZ-BS11
1-jack Expansion Board for
Expansion Chassis
0
1
3
–
1
1
4
–
1
1
4
1 is factory
installed with each
chassis
1
2
4
1 is factory
installed with each
chassis
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for Interface
Package
Comments
Chassis:
CHS2U
(19” Chassis)
Expansion:
Battery:
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
(External Battery Box)
Fan Box:
CHS2U FAN BOX SET
Power Supply:
MPS7101
2-8
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 2-4 Maximum System Capacities – Blades shows the maximum number for
each blade that can be installed in a system.
This is determined by the maximum blade configuration allowed. When installing
single line sets, DISA, or tie lines, CPU circuits must be allocated for DTMF receivers.
To install single line sets with CO/PBX line access, or when installing immediate-start
tie lines, CPU circuits must be allocated for dial tone detection.
Table 2-4 Maximum System Capacities – Blades
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
CD-CP00
1
1
0
0
–
PZ-32IPLA
(32-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
This unit provides 32
VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-64IPLA
(64-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
This unit provides 64
VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-128IPLA
(128-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
This unit provides 128
VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-32IPLB
(32-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
This unit provides 32
VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-64IPLB
(64-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
This unit provides 64
VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-128IPLB
(128-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
This unit provides 128
VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-ME50
(Memory Expansion Board)
1
1
0
0
–
PZ-VM21
(Voice Mail Daughter)
1
1
0
0
Does include modem
2
5
6
23
When installed as an
OPX blade
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for Interface
Package
9.5”
Chassis
Comments
Common Control Blades:
Station Blades:
CD-4DIOPB
(4 DID/OPX)
System Hardware Manual
2-9
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-4 Maximum System Capacities – Blades (Continued)
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
CD-4LCA
(4 Single Line Telephone Interface)
2
5
6
23
–
PZ-4LCA
(4 Single Line Telephone Interface
Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
–
CD-8DLCA
(8 Digital Station Interface)
2
5
6
23
PZ-8DLCB
(8 Digital Station Interface Daughter
Board)
2
5
6
23
CD-8LCA
(8 Single Line Telephone Interface)
2
5
6
23
PZ-8LCE
(8 Single Line Telephone Interface
Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
CD-16DLCA
(16 Digital Station Interface)
2
5
6
23
CD-LTA
(8 Digital/2 Single Line)
2
5
6
23
A maximum of 1 can
be installed without
ME50 card fitted.
An optional PZ-4COTE
or PZ-2BRIA can be
installed
CD-2BRIA
(2 Basic Rate Interface)
2
5
6
23
–
PZ-2BRIA
(2 Basic Rate Interface Daughter
Board)
2
5
6
23
–
CD-4COTA
(4 Loop Start Trunk)
2
5
6
23
–
PZ-4COTE
(4 Loop Start Trunk Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
–
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for Interface
Package
9.5”
Chassis
Comments
Trunk Blades:
2 - 10
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 2-4 Maximum System Capacities – Blades (Continued)
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
CD-4DIOPB
(4 DID/OPX)
1
5
6
23
When installed as a
DID blade
CD-4ODTA
(4 E&M)
2
5
6
23
–
CD-PRTA
(1 Primary Rate Interface)
2
3
3
6
This blade is used for
Primary Rate
Interface.
CD-PVAA
(Conference Bridge)
2
5
6
23
R2
CD-ETIA
(Switching Hub with Power over
Ethernet)
2
3
3
12
–
CD-CCTA
(CCIS Trunk Interface/Common
Channel Handler)
2
4
4
4
–
CD-RTB
(Router)
2
1
2
1
R2
CD-VM00
(Voice Mail and Server)
1
1
1
1
Maximum of One per
system
PZ-BZ10 (for Controlling Chassis)
0
1
0
0
–
0
1
3
–
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for Interface
Package
9.5”
Chassis
Comments
Optional Blades:
PZ-BZ11 (for Expansion Chassis)
System Hardware Manual
2 - 11
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-5 Daughter Board Combinations shows each blade and associated daughter
board combinations. The daughter boards that can be mounted on specific blades
are indicated by a checkmark. For example, the CD-LTA can have a PZ-2BRIA or the
PZ-4COTE daughter board mounted.
Table 2-5 Daughter Board Combinations
Daughter Board
PZ-2BRIA PZ-4COTE PZ-4LCA
PZ-8LCE
PZ-8DLCB
Controlling Chassis
CD-LTA
(8 Digital/2 Single Line)
4
4
–
–
–
CD-4COTA
(4 Loop Start)
–
4
–
–
–
CD-4LCA
(4 Single Line Interface)
–
–
4
4
–
CD-8LCA
(8 Single Line Interface)
–
–
4
4
–
CD-8DLCA
(8 Digital Station Interface)
–
–
–
–
4
CD-16DLCA
(16 Digital Station Interface)
–
–
–
–
–
CD-2BRIA
(2 Basic Rate Interface)
4
–
–
–
–
– = Does not apply
4 = Does apply
2 - 12
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 4
Issue 5.0
POWER-BASED CALCULATOR CHART
The Univerge SV8100 system uses two types of power factors. For a single chassis
chart refer to Table 2-6 Board Power Factor. For the maximum number of specific
blades per package, see Table 2-7 Maximum Number of Package Installed. Refer to
Table 2-8 Terminal Power Factor below, for the Terminal/ Adapter power chart.
Table 2-6 Board Power Factor
Board Power Factor
Total
=<7
Item
Power Factor
CD-CP00
1
CD-RTB
2
CD-VM00
2
CD-ETIA
2
CD-PVAA
1
PZ-32IPLA
1
PZ-64IPLA
2
PZ-128IPLA
2
Table 2-7 Maximum Number of Package Installed
Maximum Number of Package Installed
Board
(Power Factor)
9.5 inch
19 inch
with CCPU
19 inch
without
CCPU
4 x 19 inch
CD-ETIA (2)
2
3
3
12
CD-PVAA (1)
2
5
6
23
CD-RTB (2)
1
2
2
8
System Hardware Manual
2 - 13
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-8 Terminal Power Factor
Terminal Power Factor
19 inch Chassis
=<80
Item
Power Factor
DTL-24D-1 TEL
0.8
DTL-8LD-1 TEL
0.8
BHA-L Unit
2
ADA-L UNIT
2
APR UNIT
2
BCH-L (BK) UNIT
2
PSA-L( )
1.2
8LK-L UNIT
0
DCL-60-1 CONSOLE
2
ITL-320C-1 TEL
6
ITL-24D-1 TEL
4
ITL-2E-1 TEL
4
ITL-6DE-1 TEL
4
ITL-8LDE-1 TEL
4
SLT
Standard (-28V) : 0.8
Long Line (-48V) : 2
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
2
SLT Adapter
5
.
ITL factors are calculated using the CD-ETIA blade.
Table 2-9 IP Terminal Power Chart
IP
Terminal
ITL-320C-1 TEL
2 - 14
IEEE802.
3af
Class
Class 3
Label Indication
(Maximum Current with All Options)
48VDC
160mA
7.7W
24VDC
290mA
7.0W
Maximum Current Without Options
48VDC
111mA
5.3W
24VDC
192mA
4.6W
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 2-9 IP Terminal Power Chart (Continued)
IP
Terminal
IEEE802.
3af
Class
Label Indication
(Maximum Current with All Options)
48VDC
Maximum Current Without Options
24VDC
48VDC
24VDC
ITL-32D-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
90mA
4.3W
153mA
3.7W
ITL-8LD-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
81mA
3.9W
137mA
3.3W
ITL-24D-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
81mA
3.9W
137mA
3.3W
ITL-12D-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
81mA
3.9W
137mA
3.3W
ITL-24PA-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
–
0.0W
–
0.0W
ITL-24PD-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
–
0.0W
–
0.0W
ITL-24BT-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
–
0.0W
–
0.0W
ITL-8LDE-1 TEL
Class 1
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
ITL-6DE-1 TEL
Class 1
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
ITL-2E-1 TEL
Class 1
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
Label Indication:
IP Value/Sophisticated – Maximum watts when adding options or modular upgrades.
IP Value – Maximum watts when ITL-12D-1 TEL is changed to ITL-8LD-1 TEL or ITL-24D-1 TEL.
Table 2-10 IEEE802.af Class Specifications
IEEE802.3af
Minimum
Maximum
Class 4
–
–
Class 3
6.49W
12.95W
Class 2
3.84W
6.49W
Class 1
0.44W
3.84W
Class 0
0.44W
12.95W
Table 2-11 TDM terminal Power Chart
TDM Terminal
System Hardware Manual
Power
Consumption
DTL-2E-1
1.0W
DTL-6DE-1
1.1W
DTL-8LD-1
2.2W
DTL-12D-1
2.0W
2 - 15
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-11 TDM terminal Power Chart (Continued)
TDM Terminal
2 - 16
Power
Consumption
DTL-24D-1
2.0W
DTL-32D-1
2.4W
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 5
Issue 5.0
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
5.1
Cabling
This section provides cabling requirements and specifications for various
equipment used in the SV8100 system.
Figure 2-4 Connecting the DLC Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable is a diagram of the
chassis connected with each of the multiline terminals and single line
telephones by a separate twisted 1-pair cable or 2-pair cable (only for Multiline
Terminals).
Twisted 2-Pair Cable
RJ-11
DLC
Multiline Terminal
Figure 2-4 Connecting the DLC Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable
Refer to the following tables for cabling requirements and specifications.
Š
Table 2-12 DT300 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Š
Table 2-13 DT700 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Š
Table 2-14 Dterm Series i or Dterm IP Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable
Length
Š
Table 2-15 Cable Connection Between the Analog Port and the Single Line
Equipment
Š
Table 2-16 Cabling Requirements
Table 2-12 DT300 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Terminal or Adapter
System Hardware Manual
By Twisted 1-Pair By Twisted 1-Pair
Cable (without
Cable (with AC
AC Adapter)
Adapter)
24 AWG
24 AWG
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
1,969 ft (600m) 6,562 ft (2000m)
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
1,969 ft (600m) 6,562 ft (2000m)
DTL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
1,969 ft (600m) 6,562 ft (2000m)
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
1,969 ft (600m) 6,562 ft (2000m)
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
1,969 ft (600m) 6,562 ft (2000m)
DTL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
1,969 ft (600m) 6,562 ft (2000m)
2 - 17
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-12 DT300 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length (Continued)
Terminal or Adapter
By Twisted 1-Pair By Twisted 1-Pair
Cable (without
Cable (with AC
AC Adapter)
Adapter)
24 AWG
24 AWG
DTL-24D-1(BK) TEL
DTL-24D-1(WH) TEL
1,969 ft (600m) 6,562 ft (2000m)
DTL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
1,969 ft (600m) 6,562 ft (2000m)
DCL-60-1 Console*
*
-
1,969 ft (600m)
An AC Adapter is required.
Table 2-13 DT700 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Terminal or Adapter
2 - 18
Ethernet Cable
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100 m)
ITL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-32OC-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 2-14 Dterm Series i or Dterm IP Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Maximum
Loop
Resistance
(without AC
Adapter)
(Ohms)
By Twisted
1-Pair Cable
(without AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
By Twisted
2-Pair Cable
(without AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
Maximum
Loop
Resistance
(with AC
Adapter)
(Ohms)
By Twisted
1-Pair Cable
(with AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
By Twisted
2-Pair Cable
(with AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
DTH-8-1 TEL
DTR-8-1 TEL
37
700
1400
107
2000
2000
DTH-8D-1 TEL
DTR-8D-1 TEL
37
700
1400
107
2000
2000
DTH-16-1 TEL
DTR-16-1 TEL
35
660
1320
107
2000
2000
DTH-16D-1 TEL
DTR-16D-1 TEL
35
660
1320
107
2000
2000
DTH-32D-1 TEL
DTR-32D-1 TEL
26
500
1000
107
2000
2000
DTH-16LD-1 TEL
37
700
1400
107
2000
2000
DCR-60-1 Console*
—
—
—
107
2000
2000
Terminal or
Adapter
*
An AC Adapter is required.
Table 2-15 Cable Connection Between the Analog Port and the Single Line Equipment
Cable
Maximum Feet from Connected
Equipment to Telephone
ADA-L UNIT
Twisted Pair
9.5 ft (2.89m)
APR-L UNIT
Twisted Pair
50 ft (15.24m)
PSA-L (BK) UNIT
Twisted Pair
1,700 ohms
PSA-L (WH) UNIT
Twisted Pair
1,700 ohms
Twisted Pair
600ohms (including the SLT)
Approximately 1Km
Connected Equipment
LCA
.
Mixing digital and analog ports through the same 25-pair cable runs is not
recommended.
System Hardware Manual
2 - 19
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-16 Cabling Requirements
Connected Equipment
5.2
Cable
Music on Hold and Background Music Sources
Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable
External Amplifier
Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable
ITL Cabling
Cat 5 Straight Data Network
Cable – 328.1 ft (100m)
maximum distance.
Power Requirements
A dedicated 100VAC/120VAC/220VAC/230-240VAC 50HZ/60HZ circuit located
within seven feet of the chassis is required. A separate dedicated outlet for
each chassis should be installed.
Double Pole/Neutral Fusing
(power supply fuses are located at both the L and N side).
5.2.1
Power Supply Specifications
AC240V Power Supply:
Š
Dedicated 15 Amp circuit
Š
Power Requirements: 230 VAC @ 15A Controlling/Base Chassis
Š
Power Consumption: Base Chassis=263VA, Expansion
Chassis=263VA, total 1060VA
Š
Input Voltage: 90VAC to 264VAC
(Rated Voltage: 100VAC/120VAC/220VAC/230-240VAC)
Š
Frequency: 47Hz - 63Hz (Rated frequency: 50/60Hz)
Š
Phase and Wire: Single Phase, 2 Line + PE Type
Š
Grounding Requirements: No. 14 AWG copper wire
Š
Feeding Voltage: Dterm/OPX/DID: -48V
SLT: 25mA / -28V
With input voltage of 230 VAC and with full load conditions:
.
Base chassis can refer to either 9.5” or 19” chassis
Output Power: Base chassis=130W, Expansion chassis=130W, total
520W
AC Input I: Base chassis=1.15A, Expansion chassis=1.15A, total 4.6A
2 - 20
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
VA @ 230V: Base chassis=276VA, Expansion chassis=276VA, total
1104VA
KWh @ AC Input I x 230V/1000: Base chassis=0.276 KWh,
Expansion chassis=0.276 KWh, total 1.104 KWh
BTU (KWh x 3413): Base chassis=942 BTU, Expansion chassis=942
BTU, total 3768 BTU (at 240Vac)
Š
A dedicated outlet, separately fused and grounded for each chassis
should be installed
Double Pole/Neutral Fusing
(power supply fuses are located at both the L and N
side).
5.2.2
Power Supply Consumption
Table 2-17 Power Consumption
Maximum
RMS
Current
Watts Used
(Idle)
Watts Used
(Maximum)
Basic Chassis – CD-CP00 Chassis
2.19 A
96
130
Basic Chassis + Expansion Chassis
4.38 A
192
260
Basic Chassis + 2 Expansion Chassis
6.57 A
288
390
Basic Chassis + 3 Expansion Chassis
8.76 A
384
520
Chassis
5.3
Environmental Conditions
5.3.1
Temperature and Humidity
Chassis, Telephones, BCH, BHA, 16LK, Console, ADA, APR
Š
Operating Temperature: 0°C ~ 40°C
Š
Recommended Long Term Temperature: -20°C ~ 60°C
Š
Operating Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)
Š
Recommended Long Term Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH
Blades – PZ-BS10, PZ-BS11, PZ-VM21, PZ-ME50, CD-8DLCA,
CD-16DLCA, PZ-8DLCB
System Hardware Manual
Š
Operating Temperature: 0oC ~ 40oC
Š
Recommended Long Term Temperature: -20°C ~ 60°C
Š
Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)
2 - 21
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
Recommended Long Term Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH
Blades - CD-4LCA, PZ-4LCA, CD-8LCA, PZ-8LCE, CD-4COTA,
PZ-4COTE, CD-PRTA
Š
Operating Temperature: 0°C ~ 40°C
Š
Recommended Long Term Temperature: -20°C ~ 60°C
Š
Operating Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)
Š
Recommended Long Term Humidity: 20 ~ 90% RH
Door Box
Š
Operating Temperature: -20oC ~ 60oC
Š
Operating Humidity: 20 ~ 80% (non-condensing)
SV8100 Power Supply – MPS7101
5.4
Š
Operating Temperature: 0oC ~ +40oC
Š
Recommended Long Term Temperature: -40oC ~ 75oC
Š
Operating Humidity: 20 ~ 95% RH (non-condensing)
Š
Recommended Long Term Humidity: 10 ~ 95% RH
Outside Line Types
The following outside lines can be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
5.5
Š
4-wire, E&M Tie Lines (Type I or V, Dial Pulse, or DTMF)
Š
Digital Trunk T1/FT1 (Loop Start, Tie Line (E&M), or DID Signaling)
Š
ISDN-BRI Trunks
Š
ISDN-PRI Trunks
Š
VoIP Trunks (Internet Protocols)
Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications
5.5.1
Transmission
Š
Data Length:
From Multiline Terminal to CD-8DLCA: 23 bits
From CD-8DLCA to Multiline Terminal: 23 bits
Š
Data Transmission Rates:
Between CD-8DLCA and Multiline Terminal: 184K bps (voice and
signaling)
Š
2 - 22
Scanning Time for each Multiline Terminal: 32 ms.
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.5.2
Network
Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) allows transmission of data and
voice simultaneously over one communications medium. The
specifications that the UNIVERGE SV8100 system uses for
switching, clock, data bus, and timeframe are shown below.
5.5.3
Š
TDM Switching: PCM (A Law)
Š
TDM Clock: 2.048 MHz
Š
TDM Data Bus: 8 bit
Š
TDM Timeframe: 125 µs.
Control
This section indicates the speed or capacity:
System Hardware Manual
Š
Control: Stored program with distributed processing
Š
Central Processor: 32-bit microprocessor
Š
Clock: 266 MHz
Š
Interface Blade: 8- or 16-bit microprocessor
Š
Optional Blades: 16- or 32-bit microprocessor
Š
Multiline Terminal (TDM): 8-bit microprocessor
Š
Multiline Terminal (IP): 32-bit microprocessor
Š
IP Adapter: 32-bit microprocessor
Š
Attendant Console: 4-bit microprocessor
Š
SLT Adapter: 4-bit microprocessor
2 - 23
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.5.4
Electra Elite IPK Terminals and Equipment
The voltage, current, and ring signal for the Electra Elite IPK Multiline
Terminals, Single Line Telephone equipment, and AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R
Units are listed below:
Š
Multiline Terminal
Voltage: -11 ~ -26 Vdc
Maximum Current: 250 mA
Acoustical characteristics meet Electronic Industry
Association (EIA) standard proposal SP-1286 and
standard EIA RS-470.
Š
Single Line Telephone
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 25 mA
Ring Signal: 56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
Š
SLTII(1)-U( ) ADP
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 30 mA
Ring Signal: 56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
Š
AP(A)-R Unit
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 30 mA
Š
AP(R)-R Unit
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 30 mA
Ring Signal: 56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
2 - 24
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.5.5
Series i Terminals
Š
The voltage and current for the Dterm Series i Multiline Terminals are
listed below:
Voltage: -11 ~ -48 Vdc
Maximum Current: 250 mA
Acoustical characteristics meet Electronic Industry
Association (EIA) standard proposal SP-1286 and
standard EIA RS-470.
Š
5.6
Voltage, current, and ring signal information for Single Line Telephone
equipment, AP(A)-R Unit, and AP(R)-R Unit are the same a those listed
in the previous paragraph.
Dialing Specifications
5.6.1
Dial Pulse Address Signaling
Dial Pulse Address Signaling uses dial pulses (regular momentary
interruptions) to signal the equipment. The following Dial Pulse
specifications are used In the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
5.6.2
Š
Pulse Rate: 10 ± 0.5 pps/20 ± 1.0 pps
Š
Percent Break: 60 ± 1.5%
Š
Interdigit Interval: 0 pps/20 pps 770 ms. ~ 830 ms.
Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Address Signaling
DTMF signaling includes push button or Touchtone dialing. When a
key on a telephone is pushed, two tones (one high frequency and
one low frequency) are provided. In the UNIVERGE SV8100 system,
the following DTMF specifications are used.
Š
Frequencies
Two sinusoidal frequencies are provided, one from the high frequency
group and one from the low frequency group.
Š
Frequency Deviation: Less than ±1.5%
Š
Signal Level:
Nominal level per frequency: -6 ~ -4 dBm
Minimum level per frequency
Low Group: -10 dBm
High Group: -8 dBm
Maximum level per frequency: 0 dBm
System Hardware Manual
2 - 25
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
Rise Time: Within 5 ms.
Š
Duration of Dual Frequency Signal:
110 ms. default/60 ms. minimum
Interdigital Time: 140 ms. default/45 ms. minimum
Nominal High Group
Frequencies (Hz)
1209
Nominal Low Group
Frequencies (Hz)
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
5.6.6
2 - 26
1336
1477
697
1
2
3
770
4
5
6
852
7
8
9
941
Q
0
#
External Equipment Connection
Š
Door Phone or TV Door Phone
Š
External Speaker via amplifier
Š
External music source for MOH and BGM
Š
Tape recorder for voice recording via PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Š
Door Lock/Release or General Purpose Relay via PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Š
Printer for SMDR by LAN
Š
PC by LAN
Music Source for Music on Hold via Chassis
Š
Auxiliary Input: 0.6V PPS Signal Level
Š
Input Impedance: 600 Ω
Music Source for Station Background Music via ACI
Š
Auxiliary Input: 0.6V PPS Signal Level
Š
Input Impedance: 600 Ω
External Paging (Audio)
Š
Output Power: –10 dBm Signal Level
Š
Output Impedance: 600 Ω
Š
Relay Contact Rating: 500 mA, 24 Vdc
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.6.7
5.6.8
External Tone Ringer/Night Chime Output
Š
Output Level: –10 dBm
Š
Output Impedance: 600 Ω
Š
Relay Contact Rating: 500 mA, 24 Vdc
SMDR Output
Š
5.6.9
PC Connection
Š
5.6.10
Female Connector (LAN) Standard DB-9 (straight)
Relay Contact
Š
5.7
Female Connector (LAN) Standard DB-9 (straight)
All Relay Contact Ratings: 500 mA, 24Vdc
Battery Backup
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has battery backup functions for system
backup and for memory backup.
5.7.1
System Backup (Optional)
During a power failure, the system can be backed up using the
CHS2U BATT MTG KIT for a backup time of 10 minutes or one of the
CHS LARGE BATT SETs for a backup time ranging from 45~180
minutes.
5.7.2
Memory Backup
The CD-CP00 Blade battery retains the Clock/Calender and Last
Number redial (LNR) buffers for each station when the CD-CP00
Blade encounters a power loss. With a fully charged battery, the
settings are retained for about three years. The System Programmed
memory (Customer Database) is stored in non-volatile Memory and
can be erased only by a First Initialization. After power is restored,
the system Blade returns to normal operation.
System Hardware Manual
2 - 27
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.8
Weights and Dimensions
Table 2-18 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions on page 2-28 shows the
shipping weight, height, width and depth of each SV8100 digital multiline
terminal, IP multiline terminal, Dterm, Series i multiline terminal, chassis,
assorted blades and adapters.
Table 2-18 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
CHS2U
278.7 oz
(7.9 kg)
3.47 in
(88 mm)
16.9 in
(430 mm)
14.17 in
(360 mm)
CHS2U GW
158.7 oz
(4.5 kg)
4.53 in
(115 mm)
8.66 in
(220 mm)
14.53 in
(369 mm)
CD-CP00
7.06 oz
(0.2 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.09 in
(180 mm)
PZ-ME50
.353 oz
(0.01 kg)
0.12 in
(3 mm)
2.56 in
(65 mm)
1.22 in
(31 mm)
CD-LTA
6.70 oz
(0.19 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.09 in
(180 mm)
MGN-U10 ETU
14.6 oz
(0.41 kg)
1.89 in
(48mm)
11.47 in
(290 mm)
8.46 in
(214 mm)
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
352.7 oz
(10 kg)
23.23 in
(590 mm)
17.72 in
(450 mm)
10.43 in
(265 mm)
CHS LARGE BATT SET
194 oz
(5.5 kg)
6.69 in
(170 mm)
5.91 in
(150 mm)
4.33 in
(110 mm)
MPS7101
31.75 oz
(0.9 kg)
2.36 in
(60 mm)
7.08 in
(180 mm)
6.10 in
(155 mm)
PZ-BS10
2.29 oz
(.065 kg)
0.91 in
(23 mm)
2.17 in
(55 mm)
7.28 in
(185 mm)
PZ-BS11
1.975 oz
(0.056 kg)
0.91 in
(23 mm)
2.17 in
(55 mm)
7.28 in
(185 mm)
PZ-VM21
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.60”
(15 mm)
2.09 in
(53 mm)
3.35 in
(85 mm)
PZ-32IPLA
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
6.3 in
(160 mm)
PZ-64IPLA
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
6.3 in
(160 mm)
PZ-128IPLA
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
6.3 in
(160 mm)
Unit
SV8100
Common
2 - 28
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 2-18 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
CD-8DLCA
5.89 oz
(0.167 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.09 in
(180 mm)
PZ-8DLCB
4.41 oz
(0.125 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
4.72 in
(120 mm)
5.12 in
(130 mm)
CD-16DLCA
7.831 oz
(0.222 kg)
1.89 in
(48 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-4COTA
6.35 oz
(0.18 kg)
1.89 in
(48 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
PZ-4COTE
3.53 oz
(0.10 kg)
1.89 in
(48 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
5.12 in
(130 mm)
CD-4LCA
5.99 oz
(0.17 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
PZ-4LCA
3.10 oz
(0.09 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-8LCA
6.46 oz
(0.183 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
PZ-8LCE
3.70 oz
(0.105 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
5.12 in
(130 mm)
CD-2BRIA
5.99 oz
(0.17 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
PZ-2BRIA
4.02 oz
(0.114 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
4.72 in
(120 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-PRTA
5.5 oz
(0.156 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
3.94 in
(100 mm)
CD-CCTA
5.5 oz
(0.156 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-4ODTA
8.25 oz
(0.234 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-RTB
12.17 oz
(0.345 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-VM00
7.76 oz
(0.22 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-PVAA
10.05 oz
(0.285 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-ETIA
12.17 oz
(0.345 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-4DIOPB
7.73 oz
(0.219 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
Unit
System Hardware Manual
2 - 29
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-18 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
CHS BASE UNIT
21.87 oz
(0.62 kg)
23.23 in
(590 mm)
17.72 in
(450 mm)
10.43 in
(265 mm)
CHS2U BLANK SLOT COVER KIT
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
2.32 in
(60 mm)
1.57 in
(40 mm)
1.57 in
(40 mm)
CHS L BATT BOX RACK MOUNT BRACKET
352.7 oz
(10 kg)
18.5 in
(470 mm)
14.6 in
(370 mm)
2.76 in
(70 mm)
CHS2U INT BATT SET
95.24 oz
(2.7 kg)
4.33 in
(110 mm)
2.76 in
(70 mm)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
CHS2U RACK MOUNT KIT
17.6 oz
(0.5 kg)
0.91 in
(23 mm)
9.65 in
(245 mm)
3.35 in
(85 mm)
CHS1U/2U WALL MOUNT KIT
35.27 oz
(1 kg)
1.18 in
(30 mm)
13.8 in
(350 mm)
1.77 in
(45 mm)
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
458.6 oz
(13 kg)
5.24 in
(133 mm)
16.93 in
(430 mm)
14.3 in
(363 mm)
CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT
7.06 oz
(0.2 kg)
0.19 in
(3 mm)
5.91 in
(150 mm)
1.7 in
(43 mm)
CHS2U BATT MTG KIT 6 Slot
106 oz
(3.0 kg)
2.95 in
(75 mm)
4.45 in
(113 mm)
4.13 in
(105 mm)
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
35.27 oz
(1.0 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
38.8 oz
(1.1 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
DTL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.39 in
(264 mm)
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.29 in
(109 mm)
7.6 in
(183 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.6 in
(183 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
DTL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
42.33 oz
(1.2 kg)
4.39 in
(111.7 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
DTL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
42.33 oz
(1.2 kg)
4.39 in
(111.7 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
DTL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg
4.39 in
(111.7 mm)
8.1 in
(205.8 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
35.27 oz
(1.0 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
Unit
Digital Multiline Terminal
IP Multiline Terminal
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
2 - 30
SV8100 System Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 2-18 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
38.8 oz
(1.1 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
63.66 oz
(1.98 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.39 in
(264 mm)
ITL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.29 in
(109 mm)
7.59 in
(193 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
42.33 oz
(1.2 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.59 in
(193 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
ITL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
42.33 oz
(1.2 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
ITL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
8.1 in
(205.8 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
56.44 oz
(1.6 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
8.94 in
(227 mm)
9.84 in
(250 mm)
8LK-L (BK) UNIT
8LK-L (WH) UNIT
7.05 oz
(0.2 kg)
1.77 in
(45 mm)
1.15 in
(29.3 mm)
8.82 in
(224 mm)
ADA-L UNIT
2.82 oz
(0.08 kg)
.98 in
(25 mm)
2.56 in
(65 mm)
3.23 in
(82 mm)
APR UNIT
5.29 oz
(0.15 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
2.56 in
(65 mm)
3.23 in
(82 mm)
BCH-L (BK) UNIT
31.75 ox
(0.9 kg)
4.41 in
(112 MM)
3.19 in
(81 mm)
8.8 in
(223 mm)
BHA-L Unit
5.29 ox
(0.15 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
2.56 in
(65 mm)
2.84 in
(72 mm)
IPLA-R UNIT
2.82 oz
(0.08 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
2.24 in
(57 mm)
3.94 in
(100 mm)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
12.4 oz
(0.35 kg)
1.58 in
(40 mm)
6.81 in
(173 mm)
4.13 in
(105 mm)
DCL-60-1 (BK) CONSOLE
DCL-60-1 (WH) CONSOLE
21.16 oz
(.6 kg)
3.23 in
(82 mm)
5.39 in
(137 mm)
8.82 in
(224 mm)
PSA-L (BK) UNIT
PSA-L (WH) UNIT
10.58 oz
(0.3 kg)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
2.91 in
(74 mm)
8.8 in
(223 mm)
Unit
Optional
System Hardware Manual
2 - 31
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-18 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
GBA-L UNIT
23.99 ox
(0.68 kg)
5.9 in
(150 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
6.34 in
(161 mm)
AC-L UNIT
12 oz
(0.34 kg)
1.10 in
(28 mm)
1.77 in
(45 mm)
3.98 in
(101 mm)
WM-L UNIT
1.58 oz
(0.045 kg)
0.996 in
(25.3 mm)
3.996 in
(101.5 mm)
4.92 in
(125 mm)
60 DSS WM-L UNIT
1.41 oz
(0.04 kg)
0.99 in
(25.3 mm)
3.4 in
*86.5 mm)
4.92 in
(125 mm)
G955 Wireless Handset
3.13 oz
(0.08 kg)
4.96 in
(126 mm)
1.77 in
(45 mm)
0.78 in
( 20 mm)
3.53 ox
(0.1001 kg)
5.31 in
(135 mm)
1.89 in
(48 mm)
0.63 in
(16 mm)
Unit
MH240
1 Shipping weight includes the shipping carton.
2 - 32
SV8100 System Specifications
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter contains information to help the technician install the chassis
for the SV8100 system. The technician should be familiar with this section
before installing any equipment.
SECTION 2
INSTALLING THE CHASSIS
The CHS2U-EU chassis has six universal blade slots for legacy line/trunk
blade (Single Line Telephone Interface, Digital Multiline Terminal
Interface, Central Office Trunk, ISDN PRI Interface, etc.), In-skin
Application Blades (In-skin UMS, In-Skin Router, etc.). It also houses the
BUS Interface Blade, Power Supply Unit (PSU) and Cooling FAN.
Chapter
3
When the CD-CP00 blade is installed in the first 19” chassis, it is referred
to as the controlling chassis. Additional chassis, referred to as expansion
chassis, can be installed to increase the capacity of the system to meet the
customer’s business needs. Each chassis (Expansion or Controlling), is
powered by a MPS7101 power supply.
The chassis can be wall mounted, floor mounted, stand mounted or rack
mounted. The first part of the this chapter describes the differing types of
mounting options and the rest of this section describes how to install the
chassis.
System Hardware Manual
3-1
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Universal Slot for Legacy Line/Trunk blades and
Application blades (six slots). When used as
controlling chassis, the CD-CP00 is mounted in
Slot 1 (shown).
Slot for PZ-BS10/PZ-BS11 blade
– Connection with CHS2U chassis
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
Figure 3-1 CHS2U Chassis (Front View)
Internal Battery Mount
AC Connector
Fan Unit
(inside of cover)
Frame Ground
(FG) Terminal
Battery Connector
(inside of cover)
Figure 3-2 CHS2U Chassis (Rear View)
3-2
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
The CHS2U GW chassis has three universal blade slots for station, trunk and optional
blades.The chassis can be wall-mounted or stand-mounted. The first part of the this
chapter describes the differing types of mounting options and the rest of this section
describes how to install the chassis.
Figure 3-3 CHS2U GW (Front View)
Figure 3-4 CHS2U GW (Rear View)
System Hardware Manual
3-3
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.1
Wall Mounting the 19” Chassis
When wall mounting the chassis, ensure the wall can support the weight of the
chassis (55 lbs per system chassis ---- including blades, cords, power supply,
etc.). The chassis is secured to the wall with a wall mount bracket. Ensure
that enough space is available to allow the installation of additional expansion
chassis.
2.1.1
CHS2U Chassis Wall Mount Installation
1.
Use the template shown in Figure 3-5 Wall Mount Spacing
Guide (19” Chassis) on page 3-4 for required spacing before
drilling.
Upper Surface of Wall Mount Bracket
Figure 3-5 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (19” Chassis)
3-4
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Hardware Manual
Issue 5.0
2.
Mark and drill the six holes required for a wall installation.
3.
Align screw holes in wall mount brackets with drilled holes.
3-5
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Using six screws, secure the two wall mount brackets to the
wall. Refer to Figure 3-6 Install Wall Mount Brackets with
Screws for screw location.
Figure 3-6 Install Wall Mount Brackets with Screws
5.
3-6
Using four screws, secure the metal fittings on the Left and
Right sides of the 19” chassis. Refer to Figure 3-7 Install Wall
Mount Brackets with Screws on page 3-7 for screw location.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-7 Install Wall Mount Brackets with Screws
System Hardware Manual
3-7
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.
Align the metal fitting with the upper wall mount bracket. The
lower metal fitting rests against the lower wall mount bracket.
Secure the metal fitting and upper wall mount bracket with a
single screw (see Figure 3-8 Secure Metal Fitting to Upper Wall
Mount Bracket with a Screw).
Figure 3-8
7.
3-8
Secure Metal Fitting to Upper Wall Mount Bracket
with a Screw
Using two screws, secure the metal fitting to the lower wall
mount bracket. Refer to Figure 3-9 Secure Metal Fitting to
Lower Wall Mount Bracket with Screws on page 3-9 for screw
location.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-9
8.
System Hardware Manual
Secure Metal Fitting to Lower Wall Mount
Bracket with Screws
Attach the supplied cable support bracket to either end of the
lower wall mount bracket with a single screw (refer to Figure
3-10 Attach Cable Support Bracket with Screw on page 3-10).
3-9
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 3-10 Attach Cable Support Bracket with Screw
9.
3 - 10
The cable support bracket can be installed any of the four
corners of the 19” chassis (refer to Figure 3-11 Attach Cable
Support Bracket with Screw on page 3-11).
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-11 Attach Cable Support Bracket with Screw
System Hardware Manual
10.
Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 2.7.5 Install
19” Chassis Grounding on page 3-52 for complete details on
grounding the system.
11.
Refer to 2.7 Installing the 19” Chassis on page 3-39 to continue
installation of the chassis or, Chapter 5 paragraph 2.2 Installing
an Extension or Trunk Blade on page 4-4 for installation of
blades.
3 - 11
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.2
Floor Mounting the 19” Chassis
The CHS2U controlling and expansion chassis can be mounted on the floor
using the CHS BASE UNIT and the CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT.
2.2.1
CHS2U Chassis Installation
1.
Use the template shown in Figure 3-12 Floor Mount Spacing
Guide for required spacing before drilling holes for 0.39”
(10mm) anchor bolts (locally procured).
Figure 3-12 Floor Mount Spacing Guide
3 - 12
2.
Mark and drill the four holes required for installing the CHS
BASE UNIT.
3.
Using anchor bolts, secure the CHS BASE UNIT to the floor.
Refer to Figure 3-13 Secure CHS BASE UNIT with Anchor
Bolts on page 3-13 for screw location.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
.
Figure 3-13 Secure CHS BASE UNIT with Anchor Bolts
4.
Install the five rubber feet to the bottom of the chassis.
Figure 3-14 Install Rubber Feet
System Hardware Manual
5.
Position the chassis on top of the CHS BASE UNIT.
6.
Secure the chassis to the CHS BASE UNIT using eight screws
supplied with the CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT.
3 - 13
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 3-15 Install CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT
2.2.2
7.
Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 2.7.5 Install
19” Chassis Grounding on page 3-52 for complete details on
grounding the system.
8.
Refer to 2.7 Installing the 19” Chassis on page 3-39 to continue
installation of the chassis or, Chapter 5 paragraph 2.2
Installing an Extension or Trunk Blade on page 4-4 for
installation of blades.
Multiple CHS2U Chassis Installation
Expansion chassis can be secured to the CHS BASE UNIT and will
require an additional CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT per chassis.
3 - 14
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
1.
Install the five rubber feet to the bottom of each chassis.
Figure 3-16 Install Rubber Feet
2.
Using supplied screws in the CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT,
attach metal brackets to both ends of the 19” chassis and the
CHS BASE UNIT. Refer to Figure 3-17 Install Metal Brackets
with Screws.
Metal
Brackets
Figure 3-17 Install Metal Brackets with Screws
System Hardware Manual
3 - 15
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.3
3.
Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 2.7.5 Install
19” Chassis Grounding on page 3-52 for complete details on
grounding the system.
4.
Refer to 2.7 Installing the 19” Chassis on page 3-39 to continue
installation of the chassis or, Chapter 5 paragraph 2.2
Installing an Extension or Trunk Blade on page 4-4 for
installation of blades.
Stand Mounting the 19” Chassis
A single or multiple chassis can be stand mounted. Controlling and Expansion
chassis can be stand mounted using the CHS2U STAND KIT(K) and CHS2U
STAND KIT (EXT).
2.3.1
CHS2U Chassis Installation
1.
Using the supplied screws, assemble the CHS2U STAND
KIT(K) and CHS2U STAND KIT (EXT) (refer to Figure 3-18
Assemble Stand Mount with Screws).
Expansion
Plate
Figure 3-18 Assemble Stand Mount with Screws
2.
3 - 16
Secure the CHS2U chassis to the assembled CHS2U STAND
KIT, see Figure 3-19 Secure CHS2U Chassis to CHS2U
STAND KIT with Screws on page 3-17.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Expansion
Plate
Figure 3-19 Secure CHS2U Chassis to CHS2U STAND KIT with Screws
3.
System Hardware Manual
Using supplied screws, secure the CHS2U STAND KIT to the
floor (refer to Figure 3-20 Secure Stand Mount to Floor with
Screws on page 3-18).
3 - 17
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 3-20 Secure Stand Mount to Floor with Screws
3 - 18
4.
Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 2.7.5 Install
19” Chassis Grounding on page 3-52 for complete details on
grounding the system.
5.
Refer to 2.7 Installing the 19” Chassis on page 3-39 to continue
installation of the chassis or, Chapter 5 paragraph 2.2 Installing
an Extension or Trunk Blade on page 4-4 for installation of
blades.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
2.3.2
Multiple CHS2U Chassis Installation
Expansion chassis (maximum of three) can be added to the CHS2U
STAND KIT and will require an additional CHS2U STAND KIT (EXT)
per chassis.
1.
Install the five rubber feet to the bottom of each chassis.
Figure 3-21 Attach Rubber Feet to CHS2U Chassis
2.
System Hardware Manual
Each additional chassis will require CHS2U STAND KIT (EXT)
to be installed (refer to Figure 3-22 Install Additional CHS2U
STAND KIT (EXT) on page 3-20).
3 - 19
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Expansion
Plates
Figure 3-22 Install Additional CHS2U STAND KIT (EXT)
3.
3 - 20
Metal brackets from the CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KITs will be
required to secure the top end of the chassis with screws. See
Figure 3-23 Install Additional CHS2U STAND KIT (EXT) on
page 3-21.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Metal
Brackets
Figure 3-23 Install Additional CHS2U STAND KIT (EXT)
System Hardware Manual
4.
Using supplied screws, secure the CHS2U STAND KIT to the
floor (refer to Figure 3-23 Install Additional CHS2U STAND KIT
(EXT) on page 3-21).
5.
Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 2.7.5 Install
19” Chassis Grounding on page 3-52 for complete details on
grounding the system.
6.
Refer to 2.7 Installing the 19” Chassis on page 3-39 to continue
installation of the chassis or, Chapter 5 paragraph 2.2
Installing an Extension or Trunk Blade on page 4-4 for
installation of blades.
3 - 21
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.4
Rack Mounting the 19” Chassis
A single or multiple chassis can be rack mounted. Controlling and Expansion
chassis can be racked mounted by stacking them horizontally.
1.
The 19” chassis requires two rack mount brackets per chassis for
mounting. Refer to Figure 3-24 CHS2U Rack Mount Brackets.
Figure 3-24 CHS2U Rack Mount Brackets
3 - 22
2.
Line up the Rack Mount Bracket(s) with the pre-drilled holes on each
side of the 19” chassis.
3.
Secure the brackets to the chassis using the supplied screws. Refer to
Figure 3-25 Rack Mount Bracket Installed 19” CHS2U on page 3-23 for
the 19” chassis.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Repeat for additional chassis mounting.
Figure 3-25 Rack Mount Bracket Installed 19” CHS2U
4.
Carefully slide the chassis into desired location in the rack. Make sure
the hooks on the mounting bracket are inserted into the back of the
chassis, securing it in place. Note that the cabling is run through the front
of the rack for ease of access.
Each CHS2U chassis will require approximately
3.5” of height within the rack.
5.
Secure the brackets to the rack using the screws supplied.
Repeat for additional chassis mounting.
Single CHS2U Rack Mount
Single CHS2U Rack Mount
with Three Expansion Chassis
Figure 3-26 Rack Mount 19” CHS2U
System Hardware Manual
3 - 23
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.5
6.
Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 2.7.5 Install 19” Chassis
Grounding on page 3-52 for complete details on grounding the system.
7.
Refer to 2.7 Installing the 19” Chassis on page 3-39 to continue
installation of the chassis or, Chapter 5 paragraph 2.2 Installing an
Extension or Trunk Blade on page 4-4 for installation of blades.
Wall Mounting the 9.5” Chassis
When wall mounting the chassis, ensure the wall can support the weight of the
chassis and (25 lbs per system chassis ---- including blades, cords, power
supply, etc.). The chassis is secured to the wall with a wall mount bracket.
Optional wall mounting brackets exist for the 9.5” chassis (refer to Figure 3-27
Optional Wall Mounting Brackets for 9.5” Chassis). Option 1 attaches the
mounting bracket is secured to the wall and the chassis attached to the
bracket. Option 2 attaches the bracket to the 9.5” chassis and then, using the
key-holes as a guide, the assembled unit slides over screws secured to the
wall using the template shown in Figure 3-28 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (9.5”
Chassis) on page 3-25.
Figure 3-27 Optional Wall Mounting Brackets for 9.5” Chassis
3 - 24
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-28 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (9.5” Chassis)
2.5.1
Option 1
1.
Use the template shown in Figure 3-28 Wall Mount Spacing
Guide (9.5” Chassis) on page 3-25 for required spacing before
drilling.
Plywood should first be installed on the wall
where the chassis will be positioned. This
allows secure anchoring of the screws which
support the weight of the chassis.
System Hardware Manual
2.
Mark and drill four holes
3.
Align the bracket halves with the precut holes in the metal
expansion fitting provided (refer to Figure 3-29 9.5” Mounting
Brackets and Metal Expansion Fitting on page 3-26).
3 - 25
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 3-29 9.5” Mounting Brackets and Metal Expansion Fitting
3 - 26
4.
Secure the bracket halves to the expansion fitting using the
four supplied screws (refer to Figure 3-29 9.5” Mounting
Brackets and Metal Expansion Fitting on page 3-26).
5.
Turn bracket assembly over and remove the screws holding
two brackets in the shipped position (refer to Figure 3-30
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Brackets Secured in Mounting Position with Screws).
Figure 3-30 Brackets Secured in Mounting Position with Screws
System Hardware Manual
6.
Rotate the brackets into the mounting position. Using the same
screws, secure the metal brackets to the bracket assembly
(refer to Figure 3-30 Brackets Secured in Mounting Position
with Screws).
7.
Remove the end brackets from the remaining two corners and
set aside (refer to Figure 3-31 Remove End Brackets on page
3-28).
3 - 27
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 3-31 Remove End Brackets
3 - 28
8.
Using four screws, secure bracket assembly to the four
pre-drilled holes in the wall.
9.
Fit the precut holes on the 9.5” chassis over the metal tabs
(refer to Figure 3-32 Attach 9.5” Chassis to Wall Mounting
Bracket on page 3-29).
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-32 Attach 9.5” Chassis to Wall Mounting Bracket
10.
Using the screws removed earlier, install the end brackets to
secure the 9.5” chassis to the mounted bracket assembly.
Figure 3-33 Install End Brackets
11.
System Hardware Manual
Connect grounding wire to chassis. Refer to 2.8 Installing the
9.5” Chassis on page 3-54 for complete details on grounding
the system.
3 - 29
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
12.
2.5.2
Refer to 2.8 Installing the 9.5” Chassis on page 3-54 to
continue installation of the chassis or 2.2 Installing an
Extension or Trunk Blade on page 4-4 for installation of blades.
Option 2
1.
Use the template shown in Figure 3-28 Wall Mount Spacing
Guide (9.5” Chassis) on page 3-25 for required spacing before
drilling.
Plywood should first be installed on the wall
where the chassis will be positioned. This
allows secure anchoring of the screws which
support the weight of the chassis.
3 - 30
2.
Mark and drill four holes.
3.
Install four screws into the four drilled holes (refer to Figure
3-34 Install Screws (Option 2) on page 3-31).
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-34 Install Screws (Option 2)
System Hardware Manual
3 - 31
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Align the bracket halves with the precut holes in the metal
expansion fitting provided (refer to Figure 3-35 9.5” Mounting
Brackets and Metal Expansion Fitting).
Figure 3-35 9.5” Mounting Brackets and Metal Expansion Fitting
3 - 32
5.
Secure the bracket halves to the expansion fitting using the
four supplied screws (refer to Figure 3-35 9.5” Mounting
Brackets and Metal Expansion Fitting on page 3-32).
6.
Turn bracket assembly over and remove the screws holding
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
two brackets in the shipped position (refer to Figure 3-36
Brackets Secured in Mounting Position with Screws).
Figure 3-36 Brackets Secured in Mounting Position with Screws
System Hardware Manual
7.
Rotate the brackets into the mounting position. Using the same
screws, secure the metal brackets to the bracket assembly
(refer to Figure 3-36 Brackets Secured in Mounting Position
with Screws).
8.
Remove the end brackets from the remaining two corners and
set aside (refer to Figure 3-37 Remove End Brackets on page
3-34).
3 - 33
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 3-37 Remove End Brackets
9.
3 - 34
Fit the precut holes on the 9.5” chassis over the metal tabs
(refer to Figure 3-38 Attach 9.5” Chassis to Wall Mounting
Bracket on page 3-35).
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-38 Attach 9.5” Chassis to Wall Mounting Bracket
10.
Using the screws removed earlier, install the end brackets to
secure the 9.5” chassis to the mounted bracket assembly.
Figure 3-39 Install End Brackets
System Hardware Manual
3 - 35
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.6
11.
Using the key-holes as a guide, slide the assembled unit over
the screws previously installed in the wall (refer to Figure 3-34
Install Screws (Option 2) on page 3-31).
12.
Connect grounding wire to chassis. Refer to 2.8 Installing the
9.5” Chassis on page 3-54 for complete details on grounding
the system.
13.
Refer to 2.8 Installing the 9.5” Chassis on page 3-54 to
continue installation of the chassis or, Chapter 6 paragraph 2.2
Installing an Extension or Trunk Blade on page 4-4 for
installation of blades.
Stand Mounting the 9.5” Chassis
The 9.5” chassis can be stand mounted using the brackets supplied. The
following section describes this procedure.
1.
Lay the two bracket halves on a flat surface.
Figure 3-40 Position the 9.5” Stand Mount Brackets
2.
3 - 36
Using the slots on the sides of the 9.5” chassis as guides, insert the
stand mount brackets into the chassis (refer to Figure 3-41 Attach 9.5”
Stand Mount Bracket and Figure 3-42 Attach Remaining 9.5” Stand
Mount Bracket on page 3-37).
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-41 Attach 9.5” Stand Mount Bracket
Figure 3-42 Attach Remaining 9.5” Stand Mount Bracket
System Hardware Manual
3 - 37
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
With brackets snug against the 9.5” chassis, carefully slide the brackets
in opposite directions (refer to arrows Figure 3-43 Stand Mount Brackets
Installed), until they snap into place.
Figure 3-43 Stand Mount Brackets Installed
4.
Secure the 9.5” assembly to a flat surface with the four screws supplied
(refer to Figure 3-44 Secure the 9.5” Stand Mounting with Screws on
page 3-39).
To prevent possible damage to the 9.5” chassis due to
falling, NEC recommends the screws be installed in
the stand mount brackets as soon as possible.
3 - 38
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-44 Secure the 9.5” Stand Mounting with Screws
2.7
5.
Connect grounding wire to chassis. Refer to 2.8 Installing the 9.5”
Chassis on page 3-54 for complete details on grounding the system.
6.
Refer to 2.8 Installing the 9.5” Chassis on page 3-54 to continue
installation of the chassis or, Chapter 6 paragraph 2.2 Installing an
Extension or Trunk Blade on page 4-4 for installation of blades.
Installing the 19” Chassis
There are two types of chassis; the controlling (with the CD-CP00 installed)
and the expansion (that does not have the CCPU blade installed). As
discussed in other chapters, multiple chassis can be linked together to expand
the port size of the system.
System Hardware Manual
3 - 39
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.7.1
Unpacking the Equipment
Inspect the equipment for any physical damage. If you are not sure
about the function of a component, review the associated information
within this manual. Contact your authorized NEC Sales
Representative if you have additional questions. Note that the
chassis does not initially contain any blades.
Make sure you have appropriate tools for the job, including: a test
set, a punch down tool, and a digital voltmeter.
Ensure that you have a building plan showing common equipment,
extensions, the Telco demarcation and earth ground location before
you start installation. Be sure to properly plan your installation site
and that you are familiar with the installation safety precautions. If
you have not done that, please do so now.
2.7.2
Before Installation
Before installing the chassis check the following:
3 - 40
Š
Ensure that the MPS7101(Power Supply Unit) is OFF and that
that the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet.
Š
When installing the blades, do not touch the soldered surfaces
as this may cause damage.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
2.7.3
Installing the 19” Controlling Chassis
1.
Ensure the chassis is powered down.
Do not remove or install this blade with the
power on.
2.
Align the CD-CP00 blade with the Slot 1 guides of the
Controlling Chassis.
Figure 3-45 19” Controlling Chassis – Guides Slot 1
3.
Slide the CD-CP00 blade into the chassis until resistance (back
plane) is felt.
Figure 3-46 Installing the CD-CP00 Blade
System Hardware Manual
3 - 41
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Gently push until the blade seats. Tighten the two retaining
screws on front of the blade.
Figure 3-47 CD-CP00 Blade Installed
2.7.4
Installing Expansion Blades in the 19” Chassis (Optional)
When adding additional chassis to the system to expand the
capacity, a PZ-BS10 must be installed in the Controlling Chassis and
a PZ-BS11 must be installed in all Expansion Chassis. This
connection is required with any multiple-chassis setup.
The PZ-BS10 connects the Controlling Chassis to the Expansion
Chassis by connecting to a PZ-BS11, which is installed on each
Expansion Chassis. These Expansion Interface Units allow the CPU
to transmit/receive data as required to the additional chassis.
The PZ-BS10 is installed in the EXIFU slot of the Controlling Chassis
which is equipped with a CPU card. The PZ-BS11 is installed in the
expansion slot of the Expansion Chassis, which does not have a
CPU.
The EXIFU cable connects the Controlling Chassis and its EXIFU-B1
interface to the second, third, and fourth EXIFU-E1 interface.
Use only the CAT 5 cables provided by NEC to make the
connections between the Controlling and Expansion Chassis.
The PZ-BS10 provides:
3 - 42
Š
Communication Processor Interface for data handling through
Communication Channel (24 slots maximum)
Š
32 Channels for Telephony Resource (e.g., DTMF Tone
Receiver, Call Progress Tone Detector, MFC Tone Receiver,
Caller ID Receiver, Caller ID Signal Sender)
Š
DSP Resource Management
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
2.7.4.1
Connector Pin-Out on the PZ-BS10/PZ-BS11
Table 3-1 PZ-BS10/PZ-BS11 Connector Pin-Out
RJ-61 Cable Connector
PZ-BS10 – CN2, CN3, CN 4
PZ-BS11 – CN3
2.7.4.2
Pin No.
Connection
1
HW_UP (+)
2
HW_UP (-)
3
HW_DWN (+)
4
FS (+)
5
FS (-)
6
HW_DWN (-)
7
CK8M (+)
8
CK8M (-)
Install the PZ-BS10 Expansion Base Blade in the CHS2U
Controlling Chassis
Do not remove or install this blade with
the power on.
1.
Ensure the chassis is powered down.
2.
Locate the door positioned on the left end
(expansion bay) of the Controlling Chassis.
Expansion Bay
Figure 3-48 PZ-BS10 Expansion Bay in Controlling Chassis
System Hardware Manual
3 - 43
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
From the left side of the chassis, pull cover outward
to expose the expansion bay.
Figure 3-49 Open Base Chassis Cover
4.
Pull the cover toward you to remove.
.
5.
Cover must be removed prior to installation of PZ-BS10
blade.
Align the PZ-BS10 blade with the guides located in
the expansion bay.
Figure 3-50 PZ-BS10 Blade Guides
3 - 44
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-51 PZ-BS10 Components
6.
Slide the PZ-BS10 blade into the chassis until
resistance (back plane) is felt.
Figure 3-52 Installing PZ-BS10 Blade in Expansion Bay
7.
System Hardware Manual
Gently push until the blade seats and install the
supplied retaining screw.
3 - 45
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
8.
Align the door tabs with hinges and reattach the
cover.
Figure 3-53 PZ-BS10 Blade Installed
9.
Close the PZ-BS10 cover.
Figure 3-54 PZ-BS10 Installed (Cover Closed)
2.7.4.3
Install the PZ-BS11 Expansion Blade in the CHS2U
Expansion Chassis
.
For the Expansion Chassis to function, the PZ-BS10 blade must
be installed in Controlling Chassis.
Do not remove or install this blade with
the power on.
1.
3 - 46
Ensure the chassis is powered down.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
2.
Locate the door positioned on the left end
(expansion bay) of the Expansion Chassis.
Expansion Bay
Figure 3-55
3.
PZ-BS11 Expansion Bay in Expansion
Chassis
From the left side of the chassis, pull cover outward
to expose the expansion bay.
Figure 3-56 Open Expansion Chassis Cover
System Hardware Manual
3 - 47
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Pull the cover toward you to remove.
.
5.
Cover must be removed to install PZ-BS11 blade.
Align the PZ-BS11 blade with the guides located
within the expansion bay.
Figure 3-57 PZ-BS11 Blade Guides
6.
Slide the PZ-BS11 blade into the chassis until
resistance (back plane) is felt.
Figure 3-58
7.
3 - 48
Installing PZ-BS11 Blade in
Expansion Chassis
Gently push until the blade seats and install the
supplied retaining screw.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
8.
Align the door tabs with hinges and reattach the
cover.
Figure 3-59 PZ-BS11 Blade Installed
9.
Close the PZ-BS11 blade cover.
Figure 3-60 PZ-BS11 Installed (Cover Closed)
System Hardware Manual
3 - 49
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.7.4.4
Connect the Controlling and Expansion Chassis
.
Installment of the PZ-BS10 blade and PZ-BS11 blade(s) must be
completed prior to installation of the provided (CAT 5) expansion
cabling.
Expansion Chassis Interface Unit
for the Expansion Chassis
PZ-BS11
Expansion Chassis Interface Unit
for the Controlling Chassis
PZ-BS10
Figure 3-61 19” Expansion Chassis Interface Units
3 - 50
1.
Ensure Controlling and Expansion chassis are
powered down.
2.
Using the NEC provided CAT5 straight-through
cable(s), attach one end to each Expansion Chassis
CN2 connector on the PZ-BS11 blade (see Figure
3-62 System Expansion Cabling on page 3-51.
Attach the opposite end to the CN2, CN3 or CN4
connector on the PZ-BS10 of the Controlling
Chassis.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Install in Expansion
Chassis
Install in Expansion
Chassis
Install in Expansion
Chassis
Install in Controlling
Chassis
Figure 3-62 System Expansion Cabling
3.
System Hardware Manual
Repeat for additional Expansion Chassis.
3 - 51
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.7.5
Install 19” Chassis Grounding
From the factory, the SG, ETH and PBXG grounds are located inside
the chassis and are connected to the FG ground (frame ground) on
the back of the chassis.
Each chassis (CHS2U) in the system must be grounded separately
using the procedure listed below.
1.
Ensure each Chassis is powered down and unplugged.
2.
Ground each chassis by connecting a 14 AWG wire from the
FG lug on the back side of the chassis to an electrical service
ground (such as a cold water pipe).
CHS2U
FG Lug
Figure 3-63 Chassis Grounding Lug
2.7.6
Install 19” Grounding on Multiple Chassis (Optional)
From the factory, the SG, ETH and PBXG grounds are located inside
the chassis and are connected to the FG ground (frame ground) on
the back of the chassis.
Each chassis (CHS2U) in the system must be grounded separately
using the procedure listed below.
3 - 52
1.
Ensure all Controlling and Expansion Chassis are powered
down and unplugged.
2.
Ground each chassis by connecting a 14 AWG wire from the
FG lug on the back side of the chassis to an electrical service
ground (such as a cold water pipe).
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
FG Lugs
Electrical
Service
Ground
Figure 3-64 19” Chassis Grounding Lug (Multiple-Chassis)
2.7.7
Install AC Power Cords
1.
Locate the supplied AC power cord and attach to the AC Inlet
located on the back of the Controlling Chassis.
CHS2U
AC Inlet
Figure 3-65 Install the AC Power Cord
System Hardware Manual
3 - 53
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.7.8
Install AC Power Cords on Multiple-Chassis (Optional)
1.
Locate the supplied AC power cords and attach to the AC Inlets
located on the back of the Controlling and Expansion Chassis.
AC Power
Cords to
AC Inlets
Figure 3-66 Install 19” AC Power Cords (Multiple-Chassis)
2.7.9
Install Additional Blades
Refer to Chapter 5, 2.1 Installation and Safety Precautions on page
4-3.
2.7.10
Apply Power to the 19” Chassis
Refer to Chapter 5, 2.6 Powering Up the SV8100 on page 4-9.
2.8
Installing the 9.5” Chassis
The 9.5" chassis provides 48 total ports (32 digital terminals) and can include
any combination of stations and trunks below this number.Install 9.5” Chassis
Grounding.
From the factory, the SG, ETH and PBXG grounds are located inside the
chassis and are connected to the FG (frame ground) on the back of the
chassis.
3 - 54
1.
Ensure the 9.5” chassis (CHS2U GW) is powered off and the AC power
cord is unplugged.
2.
Ground the chassis by connecting a 14 AWG wire from the FG lug on the
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
back side of the chassis to an electrical service ground (such as a cold
water pipe).
Figure 3-67 CHS2U GW Chassis (Rear View)
2.8.1
Install AC Power Cord 9.5” Chassis
Locate the supplied AC power cord and attach to the AC Inlet located
on the back of the chassis [refer to Figure 3-67 CHS2U GW Chassis
(Rear View)].
2.8.2
Install Additional Blades 9.5” Chassis
Refer to Chapter 5, 2.1 Installation and Safety Precautions on page
4-3.
2.8.3
Apply Power to the 9.5” Chassis
Refer to Chapter 5, 2.6 Powering Up the SV8100 on page 4-9
System Hardware Manual
3 - 55
Issue 5.0
SECTION 3
UNIVERGE SV8100
BATTERY CONNECTION
There are two types of battery connection to provide battery life in the event of a
power failure, the internal battery and an external battery with CHS LARGE BATT
BOX.
3.1
Installing the Internal Batteries
An internal battery source using two batteries can be installed using the
CHS2U BATT MTG KIT (mounting kit) and CHS2U BATT CABLE INT (internal
cabling).
CHS2U BATT MTG KIT (Backup time = 10 Minutes/24 Terminals)
1.
Ensure the chassis is powered down.
Ensure the CHS2U chassis is powered OFF.
2.
Disconnect AC power and grounding cable from rear of chassis.
3.
Remove screws from battery access panel on rear of chassis. Refer to
Figure 3-68 Removing Battery Access Panel.
Figure 3-68 Removing Battery Access Panel
3 - 56
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.
Remove access panel containing the fan. Refer to Figure 3-69 Removing
Access Panel and Figure 3-70 Access Panel Removed.
Figure 3-69 Removing Access Panel
Figure 3-70 Access Panel Removed
System Hardware Manual
3 - 57
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.
Using tie wraps, secure CHS2U BATT CABLE INT in cable guide bracket
(refer to Figure 3-71 Installing Cable Guide).
Figure 3-71 Installing Cable Guide
6.
With supplied screw, install cable guide in chassis (refer to Figure 3-72
Installing Cable Guide).
Figure 3-72 Installing Cable Guide
3 - 58
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
7.
Install two 2.3 AH-12V batteries (locally procured) into the CHS2U BATT
MTG KIT (refer to Figure 3-73 Installing Two Batteries).
.
The first battery must be installed on the left side, then slid to the right due to an
installation tab on the mounting kit.
Figure 3-73 Installing Two Batteries
8.
System Hardware Manual
Using the supplied screws, secure the brackets to the CHS2U BATT
MTG KIT (refer to Figure 3-73 Installing Two Batteries on page 3-59).
3 - 59
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
9.
Connect the provided battery cables to the batteries (refer to Figure 3-74
Installing Battery Cable).
Figure 3-74 Installing Battery Cable
10.
Connect CHS2U BATT CABLE INT to battery connector (refer to Figure
3-75 Connecting CHS2U BATT CABLE INT).
Figure 3-75 Connecting CHS2U BATT CABLE INT
3 - 60
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
11.
Install CHS2U BATT MTG KIT into CHS2U chassis and tighten the
retaining screws (see Figure 3-76 Installing Battery Tray into CHS2U
Chassis).
Figure 3-76 Installing Battery Tray into CHS2U Chassis
12.
Reinstall access panel containing the fan and secure with supplied screw
(refer to Figure 3-77 Installing the Access Panel).
Figure 3-77 Installing the Access Panel
13.
System Hardware Manual
Connect grounding and AC power cable.
3 - 61
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.2
Installing the External Batteries
An optional (locally procured), external battery source can be used to provide
power in the event of a power failure.
CHS LARGE BATT BOX (Backup time = Three Hours for 30 Terminals)
Table 3-2 CHS LARGE BATT BOX Capacity
Configuration
Battery Capacity
(Number of Batteries)
Number of
CHS LARGE BATT
BOX
2U x 1
21AH (=3 sets of [2x12V-7AH])
1
2U x 2
42AH (=6 sets of [2x12V-7AH])
2
2U x 3
63AH (=9 sets of [2x12V-7AH])
3
2U x 4
84AH (=12 sets of [2x12V-7AH])
4
SV8100
.
3.2.1
One CHS LARGE BATT BOX can be used for 4 x 2U chassis for approximately
45 minutes.
Floor Mounting the CHS LARGE BATT BOX




1.
3 - 62
Because of injury from falling equipment, wall
mounting the CHS LARGE BATT BOX is not
recommended.
Mounting the CHS LARGE BATT BOX directly
on the floor is not recommended.
The CHS BASE UNIT raises the height of the
CHS LARGE BATT BOX 120mm (4.72”).
When the CHS LARGE BATT BOX and
CHS2U are connected for long term use, the
CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT is used.
Use the template shown in Figure 3-78 Floor Mount Spacing
Guide on page 3-63 for required spacing before drilling holes
for 0.39” (10mm) anchor bolts (locally procured).
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 3-78 Floor Mount Spacing Guide
System Hardware Manual
2.
Mark and drill the four holes required for installing the CHS
BASE UNIT.
3.
Align bolt holes in CHS BASE UNIT (see Figure 3-78 Floor
Mount Spacing Guide on page 3-63) with holes drilled in floor
and secure using four anchor bolts.
4.
Align and install the CHS LARGE BATT BOX on top of the CHS
BASE UNIT. Refer to Figure 3-79 Installing the CHS LARGE
BATT BOX using the CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT on page
3-64.
3 - 63
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 3-79
5.
3.2.2
Installing the CHS LARGE BATT BOX using the CHS2U JOINT
BRACKET KIT
Secure the CHS LARGE BATT BOX to the CHS BASE UNIT
using the CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT. Refer to Figure 3-79
Installing the CHS LARGE BATT BOX using the CHS2U JOINT
BRACKET KIT on page 3-64.
Battery Installation
1.
Loosen screw on front of CHS LARGE BATT BOX. Refer to
Figure 3-80 Removing CHS LARGE BATT BOX Cover.
Figure 3-80 Removing CHS LARGE BATT BOX Cover
2.
3 - 64
Swing cover outward and detach from CHS LARGE BATT
BOX.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
3.
Remove two screws from front of Battery Tray Suppressor.
Refer to Figure 3-81 Removing Battery Tray Suppressor.
Figure 3-81 Removing Battery Tray Suppressor
4.
Slide Battery Tray Suppressor outward to remove.
5.
Slide Battery Tray(s) out of CHS LARGE BATT BOX.
6.
Loosen two screws and remove the Battery Tray Cover. Refer
to Figure 3-82 Removing Battery Tray Cover.
Figure 3-82 Removing Battery Tray Cover
System Hardware Manual
3 - 65
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
7.
Remove two screws and remove the Battery Tray Bracket.
Refer to Figure 3-83 Removing Battery Tray Bracket.
Figure 3-83 Removing Battery Tray Bracket
8.
Refer to Figure 3-84 Connecting Battery Cables for connection
of battery cable to battery terminals. Repeat for additional
battery connection.
Incorrect installation of batteries may cause
damage to the Fuse Unit or possible fire.
Figure 3-84 Connecting Battery Cables
3 - 66
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
9.
Install batteries into Battery Tray. Refer to Figure 3-85
Connecting Battery Cables.
10.
Using two screws, install the Battery Tray Bracket. Refer to
Figure 3-83 Removing Battery Tray Bracket on page 3-66.
Figure 3-85 Connecting Battery Cables
System Hardware Manual
11.
Insert Battery Connection Cable into cable guides. Refer to
Figure 3-85 Connecting Battery Cables on page 3-67.
12.
Install the Battery Tray Cover and tighten the two screws.
Refer to Figure 3-85 Connecting Battery Cables on page 3-67.
13.
Slide the Battery Trays into the CHS LARGE BATT BOX.
14.
Install the Battery Tray Suppressor while pulling the Battery
Connection Cable(s) through the cutouts provided. Refer to
Figure 3-86 Connecting Battery Cables on page 3-68. Secure
with two screws.
15.
Plug the Battery Connection Cable(s) into the Fuse Unit. Refer
to Figure 3-86 Connecting Battery Cables on page 3-68.
3 - 67
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 3-86 Connecting Battery Cables
16.
Insert tabs on cover into holes on CHS LARGE BATT BOX.
Slide the cover left until seated and tighten the screw. Refer to
Figure 3-87 Installing Cover Battery.
Figure 3-87 Installing Cover Battery
3.2.3
CHS LARGE BATT BOX to CHS2U Connection
1.
Power down the CHS2U chassis.
Ensure the CHS2U chassis is powered OFF.
2.
3 - 68
Disconnect AC power cable from rear of chassis.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
3.
Remove fan access panel from rear of CHS2U chassis. Refer
to Figure 3-88 Removing Fan Access Panel.
Figure 3-88 Removing Fan Access Panel
4.
Connect one end of Battery Connection Cable to Battery
Connector on rear of Basic and Expansion chassis.
Figure 3-89 Connecting External Battery to CHS2U
5.
System Hardware Manual
Connect other end of cable to Battery Connector on rear of
CHS LARGE BATT BOX chassis. Refer to Figure 3-90 Single
CHS LARGE BATT BOX Connection or Figure 3-91 Dual CHS
LARGE BATT BOX Connection.
3 - 69
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Basic
Expansion
Figure 3-90 Single CHS LARGE BATT BOX Connection
Basic
Expansion
Figure 3-91 Dual CHS LARGE BATT BOX Connection
3 - 70
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
6.
Insert the access panel tab into the rear of the CHS1U-US
chassis running the Battery Connection Cable through the
cutout. Secure panel with the retaining screw. Refer to Figure
3-92 Install the Fan Access Panel.
Figure 3-92 Install the Fan Access Panel
7.
System Hardware Manual
Connect grounding and AC power cables.
3 - 71
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.3
Installing the External Batteries 9.5” Chassis
An optional, CHSGW SMALL BATT BOX can be installed to provide external
battery power to the CHS2U GW chassis during a power failure. The shortterm battery box will power the system for approximately 10 minutes.
3.3.1
Battery Installation
1.
On the battery box compartment, remove the two screws then
lift and set aside the top cover.
Figure 3-93 Remove Top Cover of Battery Compartment
2.
Remove the metal support bracket.
3.
Insert the two short-term batteries.
Figure 3-94 Installing the Batteries
4.
3 - 72
Place the battery cable on top of the batteries and adjust to take
up the extra length. Allow enough length for the connections to be
made to the equipment.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.
The metal bracket is placed on top of the batteries and able to
hold them in place. Insert the metal tabs of the bracket into the
slots on the side of the battery compartment and lower into
place. Using the two screws provided, attach the bracket to the
battery compartment.
Figure 3-95 Installing the Bracket Using Screws
6.
Insert the battery cable through the slot on the battery
compartment and connect the battery cable to the connection
points on the battery compartment (refer to Figure 3-94
Installing the Batteries on page 3-72).
Figure 3-96 Installing the Battery Connection Cables
System Hardware Manual
3 - 73
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
7.
Reattach the cover with the two screws previously removed.
Figure 3-97 Reattaching the Top Cover Using Screws
3.3.2
CHSGW SMALL BATT BOX to CHS2U GW Connection
1.
Power down the CHS2U GW chassis.
Ensure the CHS2U GW chassis is powered
OFF.
2.
Disconnect AC power cable from rear of chassis.
3.
From the back of the 9.5” chassis, remove the black plastic
square covering the two-prong battery terminal leads.
Figure 3-98 9.5” Battery Terminal Cover
3 - 74
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.
Secure the battery compartment to the chassis using the two
screws provided and attach the battery cable to the 9.5”
chassis.
Figure 3-99
3.3.3
5.
Reconnect AC power cable to rear of chassis.
6.
To power on the 9.5” chassis, refer to Chapter 4, 2.6 Powering
Up the SV8100 on page 4-9.
CHSGW SMALL BATT BOX Fuse Replacement


1.
2.
Only replace fuses of the same rating.
Fuses may be hot, use caution when replacing
them
Correct the issue which caused the fuse problem.
.
Replacing fuses without first correcting the issue could cause a fire and/
or electric shock hazard.
Disconnect AC power cable from rear of chassis.
.
System Hardware Manual
Attach to the CHS2U GW Chassis and
Connect Battery Cable
Make sure to unplug the unit from the electrical outlet prior to removing
the connection cables within the battery box unit.
3 - 75
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Unplug all the cable connectors from the battery box.
Figure 3-100 Removing the CHSGW SMALL BATT BOX
3 - 76
4.
Loosen the two thumb screws on the battery box and remove
the box by pulling on the two thumb screws.
5.
Replace the fuse(s) as needed.
6.
Replace the battery box and tighten the thumb screw on either
side of the box.
7.
Replace the battery connection cables to the battery box.
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 4
Issue 5.0
REMOVE AND INSTALL COOLING FAN
If required, the cooling fan installed in the CHS2U chassis can be removed and
replaced. The following provides the procedure for the CHS2U chassis.
4.1
CHS2U Chassis
4.1.1
Remove Cooling Fan
To reduce the possibility of electrical shock or
damage to equipment, NEC recommends
powering Off the chassis and disconnecting the
AC cable from the power source before
removing the chassis cover.
1.
Ensure the chassis is powered down.
To reduce the possibility of damage to
equipment, the installer must wear a
grounded wrist strap to protect the
equipment from static electricity.
2.
Loosen retaining screw from chassis access panel.
Retaining Screw
Figure 3-101 19” Chassis Access Panel
System Hardware Manual
3 - 77
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Swing access panel outward and unplug fan power cable. See
Figure 3-102 Opening Chassis Access Panel (19” Chassis).
Fan Power Cable Plug
Figure 3-102 Opening Chassis Access Panel (19” Chassis)
4.
Remove chassis access panel from rear of chassis.
5.
Remove cabling from retention clips. See Figure 3-103 Chassis
Access Panel Removed.
Figure 3-103 Chassis Access Panel Removed
6.
3 - 78
Remove two screws securing fan to access cover. Keep
screws for use when installing replacement fan (refer to Figure
3-103 Chassis Access Panel Removed on page 3-78).
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.1.2
System Hardware Manual
Install Cooling Fan
1.
Align replacement fan with holes and secure with two screws
(refer to Figure 3-103 Chassis Access Panel Removed on page
3-78.
2.
Install cabling into retention clips (refer to Figure 3-103 Chassis
Access Panel Removed on page 3-78
3.
Insert access panel hinges into slots on rear of chassis.
4.
Plug fan power cable into three prong plug (refer to Figure
3-102 Opening Chassis Access Panel (19” Chassis) on page
3-78).
5.
Reinstall access cover and secure with retaining screw (refer to
Figure 3-101 19” Chassis Access Panel on page 3-77).
3 - 79
Issue 5.0
3 - 80
UNIVERGE SV8100
Installing the SV8100 Chassis
Installing the SV8100 Blades
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter contains information to help the technician install the blades
for the UNIVERGE SV8100 system. The technician should be familiar with
this section before installing any equipment.
1.1
Slot Locations
Each CHS2U has six slots. In the Controlling Chassis, the
CD-CP00 must be installed in the first slot (slot 1). In the CHS2U
GW, the CD-CP00 must be installed in the first slot (slot 1).
Chapter
4
Slot Locations in the CHS2U (19” Controlling Chassis):
Š
Slot 1 – dedicated for the CPU
Š
Slots 2~6 – are universal
Slot Locating in the CHS2U (19” Expansion Chassis):
Š
Slots 1~6 are universal. (i.e., any type of blade can be installed
in these slots).
Slot Locations in the CHS2U GW (9.5” Controlling Chassis):
System Hardware Manual
Š
Slot 1 – dedicated for the CPU
Š
Slots 2~3 – are universal
4-1
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
19” Controlling Chassis
CPU Slot
19 “Expansion Chassis
PZ-BS11 Slot
9.5 “ Chassis
Figure 4-1 Chassis CPU and Expansion Slot Locations
4-2
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 2
Issue 5.0
INSTALLATION
Pre-installation planning is essential. Advanced planning minimizes installation time,
cost, and disruption of the customer business activities.
2.1
Installation and Safety Precautions
Observe the following precautions when installing the
blades to avoid static electricity damage to hardware or
exposure to hazardous voltages.
Š
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Š
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically
designed for wet locations.
Š
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone
line is disconnected at the network interface.
Š
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Š
Ground the Controlling and Expansion chassis before installing or removing
the blades.
Š
The Expansion Chassis must be installed with the system power OFF.
Š
Do not touch the blade components.
Š
Carry the blade in a conductive polyethylene bag to prevent static electricity
until ready to install the blade.
Š
When installing or removing the blades from the chassis, the installer must
wear a grounded wrist strap to protect the blade from static electricity.
Š
Although it is recommended to install the blades with the system power
OFF, most blades can be installed hot except for the following that must
be installed with the power OFF:
System Hardware Manual
Š
CD-CP00
Š
PZ-BS10 and PZ-BS11
Š
PZ-ME50
Š
PZ-32IPLA, PZ-64IPLA and PZ-128IPLA
Š
PZ-VM21
4-3
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.2
Installing an Extension or Trunk Blade
2.2.1
Installing the Blades
To install an extension/trunk blade with the system running:
1.
Insert the blade within the guide rail and push the blade
securely into position. Tighten the thumb screws on either side
of the blade.
2.
The Status LED starts flashing when the blade starts
processing (15 seconds).
Figure 4-2 Inserting Blades in the Chassis
4-4
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
2.2.2
Order of Installing Extension Blades
The order in which the station blades (CD-8DLCA, CD-16DLCA,
PZ-8DLCB and CD-4LCA, CD-8LCA, PZ-8LCE) are physically
inserted determines the numbering plan.
To avoid unexpected extension/trunk numbering if
the VoIP or Voice Mail daughter board registers
with the system first, install these boards after the
other types of extension and trunk blades have
been installed.
For example, when a digital station blade (CD-16DLCA) is in Slot 1
(ext. 200~215) and three additional digital station blades are installed
in the following order, the numbering plan below in Table 4-1
Extension Blade Installation Order Example on page 4-5 applies.
Table 4-1 Extension Blade Installation Order Example
Order of
Installation
Blade Slot
Number
1
1
CD-16DLCA
200~215
2
2
CD-16DLCA
216~231
3
4
CD-8DLCA
PZ-8LCE
232~247
4
3
CD-8DLCA
248~263
Blade
Extension
Numbers
After the initial powering up of the system, subsequent powering up
or resets do not change the slot identification. System programming
(Program 90-05) must be performed to change the slot identification.
Adding any daughter board to increase the available ports or go to a
higher capacity blade (e.g., CD-16DLCA) may require that the slot be
deleted in programming and the blade reinstalled. In the following
example, to add a daughter board to slot 2, the blade must be
removed, deleted in Program 90-05-01, then reinstalled with the
daughter board attached, otherwise the additional ports are not
recognized. This however, uses new ports for the combined blade –
the initial ports (ports 17~24 using the example below) are not used.
System Hardware Manual
4-5
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-2 Adding Daughter Board to Chassis Example
Initial Blade
Blade
Slot #
Blade
Updated Blade
Extension
Numbers
Blade
Slot #
Blade
Extension
Numbers
1
CD-16DLCA
200~215
1
CD-16DLCA
200~215
2
CD-8DLCA
(no daughter
board)
216~223
2
—
—
3
CD-16DLCA
224~239
3
CD-16DLCA
224~239
—
—
—
4
CD-8DLCA
(with daughter
board)
240~255
The system automatically recognizes each blade installed in the
system. If a blade has previously been installed in a slot and another
type of blade is to be installed in that same slot, the blade must first
be removed from the chassis and then the slot definition removed
using Program 90-05 prior to installing the new blade.
This same condition applies to extensions and other devices
connected to the system. For example, if a port was previously used
for a telephone and a DSS Console is to be installed in that same
port, it must first be undefined in Program 10-03 before the console
is connected.
2.2.3
Order of Installing Trunk Blades
2.2.3.1
Installing CD-4COTA, CD-4DIOPB, CD-4ODTB or
CD-2BRIA blades
The order in which trunk blades are physically inserted
determines the numbering plan.
To avoid unexpected extension/trunk
numbering if the VoIP or Voice Mail
board registers with the system first,
install these boards after the other types
of extension and trunk blades have been
installed.
4-6
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
For example, if four blades are installed in the following
order, the numbering plan below applies.
Table 4-3 Trunk Blade Installation Order Example
System Hardware Manual
Order of
Installation
Blade Slot
Number
1
Blade
Line Circuits
4
CD-4COTA with
PZ-4COTE
1~8
2
5
CD-4COTA
9~12
3
7
CD-4ODTB
13~16
4
6
CD-4ODTB
17~20
4-7
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.2.3.2
Installing CD-PRTA (T1/PRI) Blades
The CD-PRTA (T1/PRI) Interface blade uses the first block
of 24 consecutive trunks.
For example, if an CD-4COTA and PZ-4COTE blade is
installed for trunks 1~8, the CD-PRTA (T1/PRI) blade
automatically uses trunks 9~32. If CD-4COTA and
PZ-4COTE blades are installed for trunks 1~8 and 17~24,
the CD-PRTA (T1/PRI) blade uses trunks 25~48. The
CD-PRTA (T1/PRI) blade cannot use trunks 9~16 (even if
available) since they are not part of a consecutive block of
24 trunks.
2.3
Remove an Extension or Trunk Blade
Any blade, EXCEPT the ones listed below can be removed while the system is
powered up. To remove any of the blades listed below, the system must first
be powered down.
Š
CD-CP00
Š
CC-CP00
Š
PZ-BS10 and PZ-BS11
Š
PZ-ME50
Š
PZ-32IPLA, PZ-64IPLA and PZ-128IPLA
Š
PZ-VM21
To remove an extension/trunk blade with the system running:
2.4
1.
When LED 2 is extinguished, all extensions/trunks are idle.
2.
Loosen the thumb screws on either side of the blade and pull it out of the
chassis.
Uninstalling a Blade Slot Through Software
The installer can turn off (busy out) and delete (remove from software) blade
slots in the Controlling and Expansion Chassis in programming for port
renumbering or to replace it with a different blade. Deleting a blade may affect
blade slot programming capability. Refer to Program 90-05 in the Univerge
SV8100 Programming Manual for detailed programming information.
4-8
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.5
Issue 5.0
Blade Capacities
The universal architecture of the UNIVERGE SV8100 provides flexibility
when installing blades. With the exception of the CD-CP00 and CC-CP00
blades, any blade can be installed in any slot. Table 2-4 Maximum System
Capacities – Blades on page 2-9 (SV8100) provides a list of the blades and
the maximum capacities with various chassis configurations.
2.6
Powering Up the SV8100
2.6.1
Performing a Cold Start
This section describes the process for starting the system for the first
time or starting a system that has been turned off.
IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS
Š
Š
System software loaded from flash memory and the
customer data is erased from RAM memory.
To avoid extension and trunk renumbering, if certain
blades are recognized first, remove them from their
respective slots until the system has been reset. Then,
slot the blade cards in the correct order to retain the
proper system numbering (Use Program 10-03 prior to
performing a cold start to record the current slot
definitions.).
To perform a cold start:
1.
Turn the system power off.
2.
Once the system has powered down, push in and hold the
Load button.
3.
Turn the power switch back on to power the system back up.
Š
System Hardware Manual
With a multi-chassis system, turn on the Expansion Chassis
power supply, then the Controlling Chassis power supply.
4.
Continue holding the Load button for approximately three
seconds or until LED 2 starts flashing red.
5.
Release the Load button.
6.
When the system has completed reloading the software (two
minutes), the Status LED is flashing on the CD-CP00.
4-9
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.6.2
Performing a Hot Start
The section describes how to load system software from flash
memory and customer data from RAM memory.
IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS
System software is loaded from flash memory and the
customer data is loaded from RAM memory.
2.6.3
1.
Turn the system power off.
2.
After it has powered down, press the button again to power the
system back up. Wait approximately two minutes.
3.
When the system has completed reloading the software, the
Status LED is flashing on the CD-CP00.
Resetting the System
This section describes the process of resetting a system that is
running. Observe the important information listed in below.
To reset the system:
2.6.3.1
Initial Programming
The system can be programmed using three methods:
Š
Programming using a multiline terminal
Š
PC Programming
Š
Web Programming
To program using a multiline terminal, enter programming
mode:
1. Go to any working display telephone.
2. Do not lift the handset.
.
In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1).
3. Press Speaker.
4. # * # * .
Password
5. Dial the system password + Transfer.
4 - 10
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
2.6.3.2
Port Defaults
With the default settings, the ports are assigned as follows:
Table 4-4 Default Port Settings
Station Ports:
Port 1~99 : 200~298
Port 100~300 : 299~499
Port 301~512 : 500~5211
Virtual
Station Ports:
Port 1~99 : 201~299
Port 100~199 : 3601~3700
Port 200~256 : 3701~3757
Trunk Ports:
1~200
In the initial configuration:
2.6.3.3
Š
All Programmable Function keys are line keys (e.g., key
1 is line 1).
Š
All trunks are loop start DTMF.
Setting Up Extension Circuit Types
Run Program 10-03 to set up extension circuit types as
required. The system will automatically detect and assign
most circuit types when the device is connected.
1. Dial 10-03-01.
2. Press TRANSFER to Select the slot, port or channel
(with ESIU Blades) to be programmed.
3. Set the terminal type or option as needed.
.
If the system has DSS Consoles, Program 30-02 must be
used to define DSS extension assignments.
As the system recognizes the extension devices
automatically, when replacing the type of device connected,
the type must be undefined in Program 10-03 prior to
connecting the new device. For example, if a port was
previously used for a telephone and a DSS Console is to be
installed in that same port, the telephone must first be
undefined in Program 10-03 before the console is
connected.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 11
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.6.3.4
Saving Your Configuration
When programming is completed, to exit out of the program
option and save changes to the CD-CP00:
1. Press EXIT to exit the program options, if needed.
2. Press Speaker.
Saving System Data is displayed if changes were made
to system programming.
3. The display shows Complete Data Save when
completed and the telephone becomes idle.
2.6.3.5
Backing Up/Restoring a Database
As a precaution, it is recommended that the customer
database be saved prior to updating the system software.
There are two methods of saving the database – either
using the PCPro application or saving directly to USB
Memory on CD-CP00. Using PCPro, download the
database and save the file on the PC hard drive. To save the
database using a blank USB Memory, insert the USB
Memory into the USB Port on the CD-CP00 blade and,
using Program 90-03, save the software. Due to the file
naming structure, note that a USB Memory can only hold
one customer database (each database is saved to a
directory called DATA – this directory is overwritten if a
second database is saved to the same card). Each
database to be saved will require its own separate card
(unless you choose to rename the directory after it is saved,
then rename it back to DATA when you need to access the
database).
If the customer data needs to be reloaded, the method for
restoring the database is determined by how the database
was saved. Using PCPro, the customer database is
uploaded using the Upload option within the application. If
the database is stored on a USB Memory, use Program
90-04, with the database to be restored installed in the USB
Port on the CD-CP00 blade.
When restoring a database file, as the slot definitions may
be different, remove all blades from the system except the
CD-CP00 and the CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA in slot 2. After
the system has been reset, blades can be reinstalled.
Program 10-03 or Program 90-04 can be used prior to
updating to record the current slot definitions. If the blades
are not removed, the trunk and extension port assignments
may be reassigned, depending on which blade syncs up
with the system first.
4 - 12
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
After reloading the customer data to the system, exit
programming mode (this could take a minute or more to
save the database), then reset the system by powering
down and back up. If the system is not reset, not all the
uploaded programming changes are in effect. Wait a few
minutes for the programming to take affect before accessing
any line or special system feature. Otherwise, some unusual
LED indications may be experienced. To prevent the USB
Memory from possibly being overwritten, remove the card
after reloading the database.
2.6.4
Performing a Software Upgrade
This section describes the procedure to perform a software upgrade
on the CD-CP00.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 13
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS
Š
Š
Š
Š
4 - 14
To save customer data prior to updating, a blank USB
Memory is required. Insert the USB Memory into the
USB Port on the CD-CP00 blade. Use Program 90-03 to
save the software to the USB Memory. Note that a USB
Memory can only hold one customer database. Each
database to be saved requires its own separate USB Drive.
Use Program 90-04, with the database to be restored
installed in the CD-CP00, to reload the customer data if
necessary.
After uploading programming data to the system using
Program 90-04, exit programming mode (this could take
a minute or more to save the database), then reset the
system by powering down and back up. Wait a few
minutes for the programming to take affect before
accessing any line or special system feature. Otherwise
some unusual LED indications may be experienced. To
prevent the USB Memory from possibly being
over-written, remove the USB Memory after downloading
the database.
When restoring a database file, as the slot definitions may
be different, remove all blades from the system except the
CD-CP00 and CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA in slot 2. After
the system is reset, the blades can be reinstalled. Use
Program 10-03 prior to updating to record the current
slot definitions.
If the PZ-ME50 is installed on the CPU at a later date, a
system upgrade must be performed using theCD-CP00
upgrade procedures. When a PZ-ME50 is mounted on a
CPU, all software upgrades are stored on this daughter
board. If the PZ-ME50 were to be removed from the
CPU, a software upgrade must be performed to bring the
CPU to the latest version."
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
To perform a system software and firmware upgrade:
1.
Turn the system power off.
2.
Once the system has powered down, insert the USB Memory
containing the software upgrade into the USB port on the
CD-CP00.
3.
Push in and hold the Load button.
4.
Turn the system power on.
5.
Continue holding the Load button for approximately 10
seconds or until Status LED5 begins flashing red.
6.
Release the Load button.
7.
Wait until the Status LEDs on the CD-CP00 have the following
indications (approximately two minutes):
LED 2: Flashing Red
LED 3: Flashing Red
LED 4: Flashing Red
LED 5: Steady Red
System Hardware Manual
8.
Turn the system power off and un-install the USB Memory.
9.
Turn the system power back on.
10.
When the system has completed reloading the software, the
Status LED begins flashing on the CD-CP00. The remaining
four LEDs are off.
Š
To confirm the new software version has been installed, the
system version number can be viewed by pressing the
FEATURE + 3 keys on any display multiline terminal.
Š
The existing system software in the flash memory is replaced,
but the customer data (stored in the RAM) is saved.
4 - 15
Issue 5.0
SECTION 3
UNIVERGE SV8100
COMMON CONTROL BLADES
The blades described in this section control the common functions of the chassis.
3.1
CD-CP00 (SV8100 Central Processing Unit)
PZ-32IPLA
PZ-64IPLA
PZ-128IPLA
CN3
SW6
Battery
Fast Ethernet CN7
BGM/EXSP
Control CN 10
USB CN5
CN1
Status LED1
Status LED2
Status LED3
Status LED4
Status LED5
CN6
BGM/EXSP
Control CN8
BGM/EXSP
Control CN9
SW1
CompactFlash
CN4
CN2
Memory
Figure 4-3 CD-CP00 Blade Layout
4 - 16
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
PZ-32IPLA
PZ-64IPLA
PZ-128IPLA
PZ-VM21
CompactFlash
Battery
PZ-ME50
Figure 4-4 CD-CP00 Blade with Daughter Boards Installed
3.1.1
Description
The CD-CP00 controls all the functions and operations of the
SV8100 system using the system software loaded into the CD-CP00
memory. The system software can be upgraded as new software
becomes available.
One CD-CP00 blade must be installed in the Controlling Chassis.
The CD-CP00 functions are:
System Hardware Manual
Š
Music on Hold tone Circuit, External Source Control Circuit
Š
PZ-VM21 Interface Circuit
Š
System Program and System Data Storing Memory Circuit
Š
USB Interface Circuit
Š
Ethernet Interface Circuit
4 - 17
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
PZ-BS10/PZ-BS11 Interface Circuit
Š
Main Processing 32-Bit CPU Circuit (MPC8248 @ 266 MHz)
Š
Time Switch, Optional Blade Control Circuit
Š
Backboard Interface Circuit
The CD-CP00 provides:
Š
200 trunk ports maximum
Š
512 extension ports maximum
– 512 ports digital/IP extensions maximum
– 320 analog ports maximum
4 - 18
Š
256 virtual extensions
Š
Connection for PZ-32IPLA/PZ-64IPLA/PZ-128IPLA Daughter Board
Š
Connection for PZ-VM21 Daughter Board
Š
Connection for Expanded Memory (PZ-ME50)
Š
Supports TAPI 2.x
Š
One Green Status LED
Š
Four Red Status LEDs
Š
Five diagnostic LEDs which indicate the status of various system
functions
Š
During normal operation, the “RUN” LED will be flashing and the
remaining LEDs are off
Š
Time Division Multiplex Switch (TDM Switch)
Š
Digital Phase Locked Loop (DPLL)
Š
Tone Generator
Š
Tone Processing DSP
Š
Connection for Memory Module
Š
DSP
Š
DTMF Tone Sender
Š
DTMF Tone Receiver
Š
DTG
Š
32 Tone Resources (for DTMF Receiver, Caller ID Receiver, and Call
Progress Tone Detection)
Š
System Tone Sender
Š
MF Receiver
Š
MF Sender
Š
MFC Tone Sender
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
MF Signal Sender (Sends caller information to CO for E911)
Š
Call Progress Tone Detection
Š
C-Channel Control
Š
Conference: 64 Channels
Š
Caller ID Receiver; 32 Channels
Š
Caller ID Generator; 4 or 10 Channels for Analog Stations
Š
This can be expanded up to 20 by disabling 32 channels of the
Conference circuits and disabling the MFC Tone Sender
Š
A load switch which is used for initial system startup, resetting the
system, or when upgrading system software
Š
One Serial Port (null modem/cross-over cable required)
Š
One USB Port – USB 1.1/2.0 (requires USB driver – download from
NEC web site)
Š
One Gbit Ethernet Port for VoIP function
Š
One CompactFlash Card Slot
Š
Background Music/EXSP Control Port
Š
Status LED
Š
BGM LED
Š
EXSP Control LED
Š
Two Audio Input/Output Terminals
Š
One General Purpose Control Terminal
Š
One Music On Hold External Source
Š
HDLC Packet Processing
Š
Real Time Clock (tolerance 30 seconds/month)
Š
Internal MOH Generation (supplied from Melody IC)
Š
Call Control Server (ex: Conference Bridge Server, Voice Mail Server,
SIP Server, RTP Forwarding, VoCoder Conversion)
Š
One lithium battery (Sony CR2032 or equivalent) which provides
battery back-up of system data and RAM memory for approximately 30
months.
The CD-CP00 functions provided are:
System Hardware Manual
Š
Call Control Server
Š
Conference Bridge Server
Š
Voice Mail Server (voice mail requires a compact flash card)
Š
SIP Server
4 - 19
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.1.2
Š
RTP Forwarding
Š
VoCoder Conversion
Installation
Each SV8100 system must have the CD-CP00 installed in Slot 1
of the Controlling Chassis.
IMPORTANT INSTALLATION NOTES
Š
Š
1.
4 - 20
The chassis power must be off when installing or
removing the CD-CP00.
After removing a previously installed CD-CP00,
handle the blade, carefully, from the edges. If
certain solder points/resistors are touched on the
back of the blade, some RAM/temporary memory
may be lost (e.g., time, date, user-defined settings,
etc.)
Install the battery on the CD-CP00. The polarity “+” symbol
must be on top as illustrated in Figure 4-5 CD-CP00 Battery
Installation.
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 4-5 CD-CP00 Battery Installation
System Hardware Manual
2.
Refer to Figure 4-4 CD-CP00 Blade with Daughter Boards
Installed on page 4-17 to Install the PZ-VM21, PZ-ME50 and/or
PZ-32IPLA/PZ-64IPLA/PZ-128IPLA daughter board, if
required.
3.
Ensure the power supply is OFF, then slide the CPU into the
CCPU slot in the Controlling Chassis.
4.
If external Background Music (BGM) or Music on Hold (MOH)
is being installed, plug the cable into the CN8 or CN9 pin jack
connector on the CPU. The other end of the cable plugs into
the music source.
Š
Refer to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP in the Chapter 6 Installing
SV8100 Optional Equipment section 2.1 Using a PGD(2)-U10
ADP on page 6-1 for details on connecting to a music source.
Š
When the system software is upgraded, the flash memory is
updated with the new software version. Either the Hot or Cold
start-up method can be used or the system can be upgraded
using system software. Refer to 2.6.1 Performing a Cold Start
on page 4-9, 2.6.2 Performing a Hot Start on page 4-10, or 2.6.4
Performing a Software Upgrade on page 4-13.
4 - 21
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
3.1.3
Customer information is stored in the RAM memory and, in
case of a power failure, will be restored. The lithium battery in
the system saves the RAM memory when power is lost.
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 4-5 CD-CP00 Switch Settings for system restart/
system reset and with system power on. Figure 4-3 CD-CP00 Blade
Layout on page 4-16 shows the location of the SW1 switch on the
CD-CP00 blade.
Table 4-5 CD-CP00 Switch Settings
USB Memory Status
Operation
With a system restart or a system reset while holding the SW1
switch:
Switch
SW1 - Load
Switch
When USB Memory is not
installed:
Cold Start occurs.
When USB Memory is
installed:
USB Memory contents loaded.
When an unauthorized USB
device is installed:
System does not start and an “Illegal
USB device is connected” alarm is
recorded.
Table 4-6 CD-CP00 Switch 6 Settings
Configuration
Note
SW6-1
ON
Not Used
SW6-2
OFF
Test Mode
ON = Test Mode
OFF = Normal
SW6-3
OFF
RS232C Select
ON = Use
OFF = Not Used
SW6-4
ON
Reset Configuration
ON = Normal
OFF = ICE Mode
3.1.4
LED Indications
The LEDs on the CPU indicate the following:
4 - 22
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
RUN (LED 1) = The CPU is operating (green)
Š
LED 2, and 3 = Alarms (red)
Š
LED 4 = Flash access indication (red)
Š
LED 5 = The USB memory connection status (red)
(LED off when no USB memory installed)
Š
Refer to Program 90-10: System Alarm Setup for details on assigning
alarm LEDs.
Table 4-7 CD-CP00 LED Indications on page 4-23 provides a list of
each LED and associated operation and status indications. Refer to
Figure 4-3 CD-CP00 Blade Layout on page 4-16 for the location of
the LEDs on the CD-CP00.
Table 4-7 CD-CP00 LED Indications
LED Indication
Status
RUN (LED1)
LED2
LED3
LED4
Blinking
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Blinking
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Blinking
Blinking
Off
Access
Blink
On Steady When Boot program is initializing in
USB Memory is the flash memory
Installing
Off
On
On
Access
Blink
On Steady When Reading system software
USB Memory is
Installing
Off
On
Off
Access
Blink
On Steady When Upgrading system software
USB Memory is
Installing
On
LED5
On Steady When System operating normally
USB Memory is
Installing
Boot is starting
Initializing the disk or
formatting
Blinking Blinking Blinking On Steady When Finish formatting (SRAM,
USB Memory is Flash)
Installing
Blinking
Off
Off
Off
Blinking
Off
Off
On
On Steady When FPGA version error
USB Memory is
Installing
Blinking
Off
On
Off
On Steady When SRAM error
USB Memory is
Installing
System Hardware Manual
Off
DRAM error
4 - 23
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-7 CD-CP00 LED Indications (Continued)
LED Indication
Status
RUN (LED1)
LED2
LED3
LED4
Blinking
Off
On
On
On Steady When Flash memory booting error
USB Memory is
Installing
Blinking
On
On
On
On Steady When Flash memory data error
USB Memory is
Installing
Blinking
On
3.1.5
LED5
Blinking Blinking Blinking On Steady When Reading error of system
USB Memory is program
Installing
Off
Off
Off
Off
System starting up
Connectors
Table 4-8 CD-CP00 Connections describes each connector on the
CD-CP00, Table 4-9 CD-LTA RJ45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
describes the pin-outs for connectors on the CCPU-A. Refer to
Figure 4-3 CD-CP00 Blade Layout on page 4-16 for the location of
the connections on the CD-CP00 blade.
Table 4-8 CD-CP00 Connections
Connector
CN1
Backboard Connection
CN2
PZ-ME50 (Expanded Memory) Connection
CN3
PZ-32IPLA/PZ-64IPLA/PZ-128IPLA Blade Connection
CN4
PZ-VM21 Blade Connection
CN5
USB Memory Connection (used for upgrading software
or downloading system data)
CN6/SW2
CN7
CN8/CN9
4 - 24
Connector Description
Used for Debug Purposes
Ethernet Cable Connection (for PCPro or WebPro, CTI,
ACD MIS, IP Phone)
Pin Jack for External Source Connection (External
MOH, External Speaker, etc.)
CN10
External Source Control Connection
SW1
Load Switch
BAT
Lithium Battery Socket (for backup of SRAM memory
data)
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 4-9 CD-LTA RJ45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
USB Cable Connector – CN5 (Type A, Female)
(USB 1.1/2.0 Standard)
1 2 3 4
Pin No.
Signal
1
Vcc
2
-D
3
+D
4
GND
Ethernet Cable Connector – CN7 (RJ-45)
(10Base-T/100Base-TX Port)
1
8
Pin No.
Connection
1
Tx+
2
Tx-
3
Rx+
4
–
5
–
6
Rx-
7
–
8
–
Pin Jack – CN8/CN9
(Polarity)
Pin No.
Signal
1
EXT1
2
EXT2
RJ-45 Cable Connector – CN10
(External Source Control)
(No Polarity)
System Hardware Manual
4 - 25
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-9 CD-LTA RJ45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs (Continued)
1
4 - 26
8
Pin No.
Connection
1
NC
2
NC
3
EXCNT2
4
EXCNT1
5
EXCNT1
6
EXCNT2
7
NC
8
NC
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.2
Issue 5.0
PZ-ME50 (Memory Expansion Daughter Board)
Figure 4-6 PZ-ME50 Daughter Board
3.2.1
Description
The Memory Expansion daughter board (PZ-ME50) provides
additional memory for the system for use with license control,
expanded system networking, InMail e-mail notification, and software
updates. This daughter board is mounted on the CD-CP00 and
provides the SDRAM, Flash Memory and SRAM. Table 4-11
PZ-ME50 Capacities on page 4-28 lists the memory types and their
capacities.
Table 4-10 PZ-ME50 Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the PZ-ME50 blades when they are
upgraded.
Table 4-10 PZ-ME50 Maximum Upgrade Capacities
System Hardware Manual
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
1
0
0
50
4 - 27
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-11 PZ-ME50 Capacities provides the memory capacities for
the PZ-ME50 blades.
Table 4-11 PZ-ME50 Capacities
Description
Memory
Capacity
Equipped Memory
SDRAM
128 MB
256 MB / 16 bit x 4 pcs
Flash
Memory
32 MB
256 MB / 16 bit x 1 pc
SRAM
1 MB
4 MB / 16 bit x 2 pcs
Table 4-12 PZ-ME50 Capacities provides the maximum capacities
for the PZ-ME50 blade.
Table 4-12 PZ-ME50 Capacities
Basic System
(CD-CP00)
Memory
Expansion
Board
PZ-ME50
System 256
Port License
System
Unlimited
Port License
* NetLink
(Networked
Chassis)
64 Ports without PZ-ME50
X
–
–
–
–
128 Ports with PZ-ME50
X
X
–
–
X
256 Ports
X
X
X
–
X
Unlimited Ports (Up to 512)
X
X
X
X
X
(Memory Expansion
Board)
X = Supported
– = Not Supported
* = Refer to NetLink feature in the SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual for more details regarding the
NetLink feature.
.
Only 1 CD-LTA blade can be installed when the CD-CP00 is installed without the PZ-ME50. Up to 23
CD-LTA blades can be installed per system when the PZ-ME50 is installed on the CD-CP00.
3.2.2
Installation
To install a PZ-ME50 on the CD-CP00:
Do not remove or install the CD-CP00 with the
power on.
4 - 28
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
For installation on the CD-CP00 blade refer to Figure 4-4 CD-CP00
Blade with Daughter Boards Installed on page 4-17.
.
This daughter board does not have any switches which need to be set and does
not require any hardware setting.
Š Each node in a NetLink network requires the
Š
Š
Š
Š
Š
Š
Š
System Hardware Manual
PZ-ME50.
CD-CP00 without the PZ-ME50 installed,
supports a single chassis system only (Six slots
only).
CD-CP00 with the PZ-ME50 is required to
support a system with multiple chassis.
CD-CP00 without the PZ-ME50 supports only
(One) CD-LTA (8 Digital Station/2SLT) blade.
Failure to properly install and program ports
higher than 64 (as described below) can corrupt
the SV8100 database.When the PZ-ME50 is not
physically installed on the CD-CP00, do not
attempt to change the PCPro database
configuration to indicate that the PZ-ME50 is
installed on the CD-CP00, Program ports 64 and
higher, and then upload the PCPro
configuration to the SV8100 system. This
process can cause the SV8100 database to be
corrupted. Refer to the next bullet for the proper
installation/programming procedure.
To properly install and configure thePZ-ME50;
first install the PZ-ME50 on the CD-CP00. To
program the ports above 64 using PCPro,
perform a new download before attempting to
program the ports.
If the PZ-ME50 is installed on the CPU at a later
date, a system upgrade must be performed using
theCD-CP00 upgrade procedures. When a PZME50 is mounted on a CPU, all software
upgrades are stored on this daughter board. If
the PZ-ME50 were to be removed from the CPU,
a software upgrade must beperformed to bring
the CPU to the latest version.
A PZ-ME50 card is required for InMail e-mail
notification.
4 - 29
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.3
PZ-VM21 (Voice Mail Daughter Board inc. V34 modem)
Figure 4-7 PZ-VM21 Daughter Board
3.3.1
Description
The SV8100 voice mail is a fully integrated, “in-skin” voice mail with
Automated Attendant. In addition to the voice mail function, the
daughter board provides Voice Response System (VRS) and an
optional modem ability for remote maintenance functions. Its robust
feature set rivals the capabilities of standalone products on a single,
plug-in voice mail blade.
This daughter board is installed on either the CD-CP00.
The daughter board available is:
Š
PZ-VM21 – providing 16 channels for voice mail (a compact flash card
is required for voice mail) and a single channel V34 modem.
Table 4-13 PZ-VM21 Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the PZ-VM21 blades when they are
upgraded.
Table 4-13 PZ-VM21 Maximum Upgrade Capacities
4 - 30
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
1
0
0
50
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
3.3.2
Installation
To install a PZ-VM21 on the CD-CP00:
Do not remove or install the CD-CP00 with the
power on.
1.
Included with the PZ-VM21 are four plastic spacers. Install the
plastic spacers onto the PZ-VM21. Make sure to attach the
spacers so that they extend out on the side of the daughter
board which has the CN1 connector. Refer to Figure 4-8
Installing the PZ-VM21 on page 4-32.
2.
For installation on the CD-CP00 blade refer to Figure 4-4
CD-CP00 Blade with Daughter Boards Installed on page 4-17.
3.
Position the PZ-VM21 CN1 connector over the CN4 connector
on the CD-CP00 blade. Press the boards together, ensuring
the plastic spacers lock in place.
4.
Insert the CompactFlash card into the CN2 slot.
.
System Hardware Manual
The LED1 status lights steadily when a card is installed.
4 - 31
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 4-8 Installing the PZ-VM21
One PZ-VM21 daughter board providing InMail can be installed per system.
Refer to the Univerge UNIVERGE SV8100 System InMail System Guide for
complete set-up information.
4 - 32
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
3.3.3
Switch Settings
This daughter board does not have any switch that needs to be set
and does not require any hardware setting.
3.3.4
Remote PC Programming access
The VM21 card provides a V34 modem for PC Programming
connection.
The modem is accessed via a DIL trunk or Auto Attendant routing to
the modem access number as defined in CM11-15-14.
Using a Windows Dial Up Connection it is recommended that the
following Properties settings are used:
Š
Š
Under the Security Tab, select Advanced radio button and set the
following under ‘Settings’
Š
Set Data encryption to ‘Optional’
Š
Check all boxes relating to CHAP
Š
Uncheck PAP & SPAP selections
Š
Ensure ‘the box related to Windows logon is unchecked
Under the General Tab, select configure and uncheck ‘Enable Modem
Compression’
Once connection to the system is established select IP-Dialup from
the PC Programming connection menu and enter username and
password.
3.4
PZ-32IPLA/PZ-64IPLA/PZ-128IPLA (Voice over IP Daughter
System Hardware Manual
4 - 33
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Boards)
Figure 4-9 PZ-32IPLA VoIPDB-32 Daughter Board
Figure 4-10 PZ-64IPLA VoIPDB-64 Blade
4 - 34
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 4-11 PZ-128IPLA VoIPDB-128 Blade
3.4.1
Description
The PZ-32IPLA/PZ-64IPLA/PZ-128IPLA daughter boards are used
for converting the RTP (Real Time Transfer Protocol) packets via the
IP network and PCM highway. The daughter board is installed on the
CD-CP00. The IP telephones are connected directly to the IP bus.
When IP telephones need to be connected to a conventional PCMbased digital circuit, this board converts the IP packet signal into a
PCM signal format and connects to the PCM time division switch.
The PZ-32IPLA/PZ-64IPLA/PZ-128IPLA daughter board is required
for IP telephones to communicate with non-VoIP UNIVERGE
SV8100 telephones, and place or receive outside calls.
The VoIP daughter board provides the voice (RTP/RTCP) processing
function. The call control function is mounted on the CPU. Only one
version of the VOIPDB (32, 64, or 128) can be installed on the CPU
at a time.
The VOIPDB daughter board provides:
System Hardware Manual
Š
32 (PZ-32IPLA) channels
Š
64 (PZ-64IPLA) channels
Š
128 (PZ-128IPLA) channels
4 - 35
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-14 IPLA Daughter Board Maximum Upgrade Capacities
provides the maximum capacities for the VOIPDB blades when they
are upgraded.
Table 4-14 IPLA Daughter Board Maximum Upgrade Capacities
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
PZ-32IPLA
1
0
0
50
PZ-64IPLA
1
0
0
50
PZ-128IPLA
1
0
0
50
VOIPU
When installing a IPLA Daughter board, the system allocates the
maximum number of trunk ports for the blade being installed.
This daughter board is installed on either the CD-CP00.
3.4.2
Installation
To install a PZ-32IPLA/PZ-64IPLA/PZ-128IPLA on the CD-CP00 :
Do not remove or install the CD-CP00 with the
power on.
1.
With the system power off, remove the CD-CP00.
2.
Install the IPLA Daughter board onto the CD-CP00 blade.
3.
Insert the CD-CP00 into slot 1 in the Controlling Chassis or.
.
3.4.3
Refer to Figure 3-45 19” Controlling Chassis – Guides Slot 1 on page
3-41 for more details.
4.
Connect the IPLA Daughter board to the CD-RTB or to an
external switching hub using an ethernet cable.
5.
Refer to the Univerge SV8100 Programming Manual for
detailed programming instructions.
Switch Settings
These daughter boards do not have any switches that need to be set
and do not require any hardware setting.
4 - 36
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
3.4.4
LED Indications
LED indications for the PZ-32IPLA, PZ-64IPLA and PZ-128IPLA
Daughter Boards are indicated in Table 4-17 IPLB Daughter Board
LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and
LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-4 CD-CP00 Blade
with Daughter Boards Installed on page 4-17 for the location of the
LEDs on the blades.
Table 4-15 IPLA Daughter Board LED Indications
LED
Function
LED Status
Operation Status
Link 10/100
(LED 1)
10Base-T/100Base-TX link
speed indicator
On Red
100Base-TX link up
LINK 1000
(LED2)
1000Base-T link speed
indicator
On Red
1000Base-T link up
DUPLEX
(LED3)
Duplex Status
On Yellow
Full duplex operation
ACT
(LED4)
Link activity or data
transmission and reception
On Green
Link up completed
The following table shows the LED indication when transmitting or
receiving data on CN1.
Table 4-16 VOIPDB LED CN1 Transmit/Receive Data Indications
Link Up
Auto Negotiation Mode
Force Mode
LED
1000
M bps
100Mbps
10Mbps
Half
Full
Half
Full
1000
M bps
100Mbps
10Mbps
Half
Full
Half
Full
ACT (LED4)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DUPLEX (LED3)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
LINK1000 (LED2)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LINK10_100
(LED1)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
System Hardware Manual
4 - 37
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.4.5
Connectors
Figure 4-14 VoIP Connections shows a typical connection layout.
Figure 4-15 Connecting a IPLA Daughter Board to a Network/PC
illustrates how to connect a VoIP Daughter Board to a Network or
PC.
Figure 4-12 VoIP Connections
4 - 38
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.5
Issue 5.0
PZ-32IPLB/PZ-64IPLB/PZ-128IPLB (Voice over IP Daughter
Boards) - (Available June 2011)
Figure 4-13 IPLB Daughter Blade
3.5.1
Description
The current PZ-32/64/128 IPLA daughter board requires a maximum
of eight DSP IP addresses. The new PZ-32/64/128 IPLB requires
only one DSP IP address for all three daughter board types.
The VOIPDB daughter board provides:
Š
32 (PZ-32IPLB) channels
Š
64 (PZ-64IPLB) channels
Š
128 (PZ-128IPLB) channels
Refer to the following table for maximum upgrade capacities of the
PZ-32IPLB/PZ-64IPLB/PZ-128IPLB daughter board:
Š
Table 2-4 Maximum System Capacities – Blades
When installing a IPLB Daughter board, the system allocates the
maximum number of trunk ports for the blade being installed.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 39
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.5.2
Installation
To install a PZ-32IPLB/PZ-64IPLB/PZ-128IPLB on the CD-CP00 :
Do not remove or install the CD-CP00 with the
power on.
1.
With the system power off, remove the CD-CP00.
2.
Install the IPLA Daughter board onto the CD-CP00 blade.
3.
Insert the CD-CP00 into slot 1 in the Controlling Chassis or.
.
3.5.3
Refer to Figure 3-45 19” Controlling Chassis – Guides Slot 1 on page
3-41 for more details.
4.
Connect the IPLB Daughter board to the CD-RTB or to an
external switching hub using an ethernet cable.
5.
Refer to the Univerge SV8100 Programming Manual for
detailed programming instructions.
Switch Settings
These daughter boards do not have any switches that need to be set
and do not require any hardware setting.
3.5.4
LED Indications
LED indications for the PZ-32IPLB, PZ-64IPLB and PZ-128IPLB
Daughter Boards are indicated in Table 4-17 IPLB Daughter Board
LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and
LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-4 CD-CP00 Blade
with Daughter Boards Installed on page 4-17 for the location of the
LEDs on the blades.
Table 4-17 IPLB Daughter Board LED Indications
LED
4 - 40
Function
LED Status
Operation Status
Link 10/100
(LED 1)
10Base-T/100Base-TX link
speed indicator
On Red
100Base-TX link up
LINK 1000
(LED2)
1000Base-T link speed
indicator
On Red
1000Base-T link up
DUPLEX
(LED3)
Duplex Status
On Yellow
Full duplex operation
ACT
(LED4)
Link activity or data
transmission and reception
On Green
Link up completed
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
The following table shows the LED indication when transmitting or
receiving data on CN1.
Table 4-18 VOIPDB LED CN1 Transmit/Receive Data Indications
Link Up
Auto Negotiation Mode
Force Mode
LED
1000
M bps
100Mbps
10Mbps
Half
Full
Half
Full
1000
M bps
100Mbps
10Mbps
Half
Full
Half
Full
ACT (LED4)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DUPLEX (LED3)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
LINK1000 (LED2)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LINK10_100
(LED1)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
System Hardware Manual
4 - 41
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.5.5
Connectors
Figure 4-14 VoIP Connections shows a typical connection layout.
Figure 4-15 Connecting a IPLA Daughter Board to a Network/PC
illustrates how to connect a VoIP Daughter Board to a Network or
PC.
Figure 4-14 VoIP Connections
4 - 42
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 4-15 Connecting a IPLA Daughter Board to a Network/PC
System Hardware Manual
4 - 43
Issue 5.0
SECTION 4
UNIVERGE SV8100
STATION BLADES
4.1
CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA (Digital Station Interface)
Figure 4-16 CD-8DLCA Blade
4 - 44
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 4-17 CD-16DLCA Blade
4.1.1
Description
These blades provide:
System Hardware Manual
Š
8 (CD-8DLCA) OR 16 (CD-16DLCA) digital extension circuits (used for
digital telephones, DSS consoles, SLT(1)-U( ) ADP, PGD(2)-U10 ADP
adapters)
Š
These ports provide -48V feeding.
Š
Two blade status LEDs – One Live LED, One Busy/Idle LED
4 - 45
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-19 CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA Maximum Upgrade Capacities
provides the maximum capacities for the ESIU blades when they are
upgraded.
Table 4-19 CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA Maximum Upgrade Capacities
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
CD-8DLCA
5
6
23
32
CD-16DLCA
5
5
20
32
ESIU
4.1.2
Installation
The CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA blades can be installed in any universal
slot in the system and up to a maximum of 20 DLCA blades can be
installed per system, providing up to 368 digital ports.
To install the PZ-8DLCB/CD-16DLCA:
4.1.3
1.
If installing the CD-8DLCA and the PZ-8DLCB daughter board
is to be attached, do so now. Refer to 4.2.2 Installation on page
4-50.
2.
Each CNx01 connector (CN101, CN201, CN301, CN401) is
used to connect up to four digital extensions.
LED Indications
LEDs for the CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA are described in Table 4-20
CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its
associated function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure
4-16 CD-8DLCA Blade and Figure 4-17 CD-16DLCA Blade for the
location of the LEDs on the blades.
Table 4-20 CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA LED Indications
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
On
Flash (1s)
4 - 46
Busy LED
(Red)
On
Operation Status
System Initializing
Remarks
–
On
The assignment of the unit is refused.
When you exceed the system
capacity.
When the main software
version is not matched.
Flash (1s)
Trouble found during self-diagnostics.
–
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 4-20 CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA LED Indications (Continued)
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
Operation Status
Busy LED
(Red)
On
Flash
(100ms)
Normal
Operation
Off
On
Unit Busy
Off
Off
Flash (100ms
On/Off)
4.1.4
Remarks
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
Downloading firmware.
–
Connectors
The CNx01 connectors provide connection to four digital station
ports. With the CD-16DLCA blade, the CN101, CN201, CN301, and
CN401 connectors are available. With the CD-8DLCA blade the
CN301 and CN401connectors are removed from the blade.
Any cabling to the DLCA blade must be within the
building - no outside cabling is permitted.
Table 4-21 CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA/ RJ-61 Cable Connector
Pin-Outs on page 4-48 show the pin-outs for the RJ-61 connector.
Refer to Figure 4-16 CD-8DLCA Blade on page 4-44 and Figure 4-17
CD-16DLCA Blade on page 4-45 for the location of the connectors
on the ESIU blades.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 47
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-21 CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA/ RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-61 Cable Connector
CD-8DLCA – CN101 (ports 1~4), CN201 (ports 5~8)
CD-16DLCA – CN101 (ports 1~4), CN201 (ports 5~8),
CN301 (ports 9~12), CN401 (ports 13~16)
Pin No.
4 - 48
Connection
1
T4 (Tip for port 4)
2
T3 (Tip for port 3)
3
T2 (Tip for port 2)
4
R1 (Ring for port 1)
5
T1 (Tip for port 1)
6
R2 (Ring for port 2)
7
R3 (Ring for port 3)
8
R4 (Ring for port 4)
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.2
Issue 5.0
PZ-8DLCB (Digital Station Daughter Board)
Figure 4-18 PZ-8DLCB Blade
4.2.1
Description
The PZ-8DLCB daughter board provides eight digital extensions.
This daughter board is installed on the CD-8DLCA and expands the
port capacity for the combined blades to 16.
Table 4-22 PZ-8DLCB Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the ESIU blades when they are upgraded.
Table 4-22 PZ-8DLCB Maximum Upgrade Capacities
System Hardware Manual
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
5
5
20
32
4 - 49
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.2.2
Installation
The PZ-8DLCB is installed on the CD-8DLCA. To install:
4.2.3
1.
Connect the PZ-8DLCB to the CN2 connector on the
CD-8DLCA blade. Refer to Figure 4-16 CD-8DLCA Blade on
page 4-44 for the location of the connectors on the blade.
2.
Install the CD-8DLCA into a slot.
3.
Each CNx01 connector (CN101, CN201, CN301, CN401) is
used to connect up to four digital extensions.
PZ-8DLCB Daughter Board Cable Connection
The PZ-8DLCB blade has connections for CN301 and CN401 Refer
to Figure 4-17 CD-16DLCA Blade for connector locations.
The following tables show the cable connections of the two RJ-61
connectors on the PZ-8DLCB.
Table 4-23PZ-8DLCB CN301 Connection
RJ-61 Cable Connector
CN301 (ports 9~12)
Pin No.
4 - 50
Connection
1
(T4) Tip for port 12
2
(T3) Tip for port 11
3
(T2) Tip for port 10
4
(R1) Ring for port 9
5
(T1) Tip for port 9
6
(R2) Ring for port 10
7
(R3) Ring for port 11
8
(R4) Ring for port 12
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 4-24 PZ-8DLCB CN401 Connection
RJ-61 Cable Connector
CN401 (ports 13~16)
Pin No.
System Hardware Manual
Connection
1
(T4) Tip for port 16
2
(T3) Tip for port 15
3
(T2) Tip for port 14
4
(R1) Ring for port 13
5
(T1) Tip for port 13
6
(R2) Ring for port 14
7
(R3) Ring for port 15
8
(R4) Ring for port 16
4 - 51
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.3
CD-4LCA/ CD-8LCA (4-Port/8-Port Single Line Interface)
Figure 4-19 CD-4LCA Blade
4 - 52
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 4-20 CD-8LCA Blade
4.3.1
Description
The 4/8SLIU blade provides four (4SLIU) analog extension ports or
eight (8SLIU) analog extension ports (used for on-premise analog
telephones, fax machines, and analog modems).
System Hardware Manual
4 - 53
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The 4SLIU and 8SLIU are not rated for OPX use. A 4DIOPU blade
should be used instead (it supports the analog DID and single line
telephone interface functions, such as Off-Premise Extensions).
Š
One extension status LED
Š
Two blade status LEDs
Š
Constant current type battery feeding (25mA / -28Vdc)
Š
DC Voltage (On hook) (-28Vdc)
Š
Feeding Polarity Reverse Ability
Š
Connector for PZ-4LCA/PZ-8LCE Daughter Boards
Š
Ring Generator (75Vrms, 16Hz/20Hz/25Hz selectable by CM82-04-02)
Š
Caller ID Sending Ability
Š
Message Wait Lamping Ability (110V DC)
Š
Cable length = 600ohms (including the SLT). Approximately 1Km
The CD-8LCA consumes eight ports ranging between ports
001~256. The CN3 and CN5 connectors each provide connection to
four analog station ports. The CNx connectors are not polarity
sensitive.
Table 4-25 CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA Maximum Upgrade Capacities
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
CD-4LCA
5
6
23
32
CD-8LCA
5
6
23
32
SLIU
4 - 54
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.3.2
Installation
Š
Š
Š
When connecting a fax machine or analog
modem, make sure to set Program 15-03-03 to
1 (special terminal) to avoid communication
problems.
The SLIU and SLIDB are categorized as
TNV2. With this designation, off-premise
wiring is not acceptable. Any cabling to the
SLIU blade must be within the building – no
outside cabling is permitted.
Branch connection is not acceptable.
Install the CD-4LCA/ CD-8LCA blade into any available universal
slot.
.
4.3.3
If the PZ-4LCA/PZ-8LCE is used, install this prior to inserting the CD-8LCA
into the chassis
LED Indications
LED indications for the CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA are listed in Table 4-26
CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its
associated function and LED and Operational status. Refer to
Figure 4-19 CD-4LCA Blade on page 4-52 and Figure 4-20 CD-8LCA
Blade on page 4-53 for the location of the LEDs on the blades.
Table 4-26 CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA LED Indications
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
Busy LED
(Red)
On
On
Flash (1s)
Operation Status
System Initializing
–
On
The assignment of the unit is refused.
When you exceed the system
capacity.
When the main software
version is not matched.
Flash (1s)
Trouble found during self-diagnostics.
–
On
Flash
(100ms)
Remarks
Off
System Hardware Manual
Normal
Operation
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
4 - 55
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-26 CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA LED Indications (Continued)
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
Operation Status
Busy LED
(Red)
On
Unit Busy
Off
Off
Flash (100ms
On/Off)
4 - 56
Remarks
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
Downloading firmware.
–
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.3.4
Connectors
Table 4-27 CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
show the pin-outs for the RJ-61 connector. Refer to Figure 4-19
CD-4LCA Blade on page 4-52 and Figure 4-20 CD-8LCA Blade on
page 4-53 for illustrations showing the location of the connectors and
the pin number locations on the SLIU blades
Table 4-27 CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-61 Cable Connector
8SLIU – CN2 (ports 1~4)
8SLIU – CN2 (ports 1~4), CN3 (ports 5~8)
Pin No.
System Hardware Manual
Connection
1
T4 (Tip for port 4)
2
T3 (Tip for port 3)
3
T2 (Tip for port 2)
4
R1 (Ring for port 1)
5
T1 (Tip for port 1)
6
R2 (Ring for port 2
7
R3 (Ring for port 3)
8
R4 (Ring for port 4)
4 - 57
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.4
PZ-4LCA/PZ-8LCE (4-Port/8-Port SLI Daughter Boards)
Figure 4-21 Installing the PZ-4LCA Daughter Board
4 - 58
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 4-22 Installing the PZ-8LCE Daughter Board
System Hardware Manual
4 - 59
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.4.1
Description
The PZ-4LCA and PZ-8LCE daughter boards are mounted on the
CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA. These boards provide:
Š
4-Port Single Line and 8-Port Single Line analog extension ports (used
for on-premise analog telephones, fax machines, and analog modems).
.
The CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA is not rated for OPX use. A CD-4DIOPB blade
should be used instead (it supports the analog DID and single line
telephone interface functions, such as Off-Premise Extensions).
Š
Connector for CD-4LCA and CD-8LCA Blades
Š
One extension status LED
Š
Two status LEDs
Š
Ring Generator (75Vrms, 16Hz/20Hz/25Hz selectable by CM82-04-02)
Š
Caller ID Sending Ability
Š
Message Wait Lamping Ability (110Vdc)
Š
Constant current type battery feeding (25mA / -28Vdc)
Š
DC voltage (on-hook) (-28Vdc)
Š
Feeding Polarity Reverse Ability
The CN2 (PZ-4LCA/PZ-8LCE) and CN3 (PZ-8LCE only) connectors
each provide connection to four analog station ports and are not
polarity sensitive. The PZ-8LCE consumes eight ports ranging
between ports 001~256 (remember that the 8SLIU consumes eight
ports).
Table 4-28 CD-4LCA/CD-8LCA Maximum Upgrade Capacities
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
PZ-4LCA
5
6
23
32
PZ-8LCE
5
6
20
32
SLIU
4 - 60
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.4.2
Installation
Š
Š
Š
When connecting a fax machine or analog
modem, make sure to set Program 15-03-03 to
1 (special terminal) to avoid communication
problems.
The SLIU and SLIDB are categorized as
TNV2. With this designation, off-premise
wiring is not acceptable. Any cabling to the
SLIDB PCB must be within the building – no
outside cabling is permitted.
Branch connection is not acceptable.
These daughter boards can be installed on the CD-4LCA or
CD-8LCA blades.
To install the PZ-4LCA/PZ-8LCE:
System Hardware Manual
1.
Included with the SLIDB are four plastic spacers. Install the
plastic spacers onto either the CD-4LCA or CD-8LCA. Make
sure to attach the spacers so that they extend out on the side of
the daughter board which has the CN1 connector. Refer to
Figure 4-21 Installing the PZ-4LCA Daughter Board on page
4-58 and Figure 4-22 Installing the PZ-8LCE Daughter Board
on page 4-59.
2.
Position the SLIDB CN1 connector over the CN4 connector on
the SLIU blade. Press the boards together, ensuring the plastic
spacers lock in place. Refer to Figure 4-21 Installing the
PZ-4LCA Daughter Board on page 4-58 and Figure 4-22
Installing the PZ-8LCE Daughter Board on page 4-59.
3.
Install the SLIU blade into the slot on the chassis.
4 - 61
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.4.3
Connectors
Table 4-29 PZ-4LCA/PZ-8LCE/ RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
show the pin-outs for the RJ-61 connector. Refer to Figure 4-21
Installing the PZ-4LCA Daughter Board on page 4-58 and Figure
4-22 Installing the PZ-8LCE Daughter Board on page 4-59 for
illustrations showing the location of the connectors on the SLIDB
blades.
Table 4-29
PZ-4LCA/PZ-8LCE/ RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-61 Cable Connector –
48SLIDB – CN2 (ports 9~12)
8SLIDB – CN2 (ports 9~12), CN3 (ports 13~16)
Pin No.
4 - 62
Connection
1
T4 (Tip for port 4)
2
T3 (Tip for port 3)
3
T2 (Tip for port 2)
4
R1 (Ring for port 1)
5
T1 (Tip for port 1)
6
R2 (Ring for port 2)
7
R3 (Ring for port 3)
8
R4 (Ring for port 4)
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.5
Issue 5.0
CD-LTA (Dterm/SLT Combination)
Figure 4-23 CD-LTA Blade
4.5.1
Description
The Digital Station/SLT Combination blade provides eight Digital
Station ports and two analog ports. This blade allows for either a
PZ-4COTE analog trunk daughter board or PZ-2BRIA daughter
board to be installed.
The blade provides:
System Hardware Manual
4 - 63
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
Eight Digital Station ports
Š
Two analog extension ports
Š
Two status LEDs
Table 4-30 CD-LTA Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the CD-LTA blades when they are upgraded.
Table 4-30 CD-LTA Maximum Upgrade Capacities
4.5.2
CCPU
CD-LTA
Without PZ-ME50
Only one supported
With PZ-ME50
Maximum of 23 per system
Installation
Install the CD-LTA blade into any available universal slot.
Š
Š
Š
4 - 64
When connecting a fax machine or analog
modem, make sure to set Program 15-03-03 to
1 (special terminal) to avoid communication
problems.
The SLIU and SLIDB are categorized as
TNV2. With this designation, off-premise
wiring is not acceptable. Any cabling to the
SLIDB PCB must be within the building – no
outside cabling is permitted.
Branch connection is not acceptable.
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.5.3
LED Indications
LED indications for the CD-LTA are indicated in Table 4-31 CD-LTA
LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and
LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-23 CD-LTA Blade on
page 4-63 for the location of the LEDs on the blade.
Table 4-31 CD-LTA LED Indications
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
On
Operation Status
Busy LED
(Red)
On
Flash (1s)
System Initializing
On
The assignment of the unit is refused.
Flash (1s)
Trouble found during self-diagnostics.
–
Off
Normal
Operation
On
Unit Busy
Off
–
When you exceed the system
capacity.
When the main software
version is not matched.
On
Flash
(100ms)
Remarks
Off
Flash (100ms
On/Off)
System Hardware Manual
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
Downloading firmware.
–
4 - 65
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.5.4
Connectors
Table 4-32 CD-LTA RJ61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs on page 4-66
shows the pin-outs for the RJ-61 connector. Refer to Figure 4-23
CD-LTA Blade on page 4-63 for an illustration showing the location
of the connectors on the CD-LTA blade.
Table 4-32 CD-LTA RJ61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ61 Cable Connector
Digital: CN101 (ports 1~4)
Digital: CN102 (ports 5~8)
Pin No.
Connection
1
T4/T8 (Tip for port 4 or 8)
2
T3/T7 (Tip for port 3 or 7)
3
T2/T6 (Tip for port 2 or 6)
4
R1/R5 (Ring for port 1 or 5)
5
T1/T5 (Tip for port 1 or 5)
6
R2/R6 (Ring for port 2 or 6)
7
R3/R7 (Ring for port 3 or 7)
8
R4/R8 (Ring for port 4 or 8)
RJ61 Cable Connector
Analog: CN201 (ports 1~2)
4 - 66
Pin No.
Connection
1
–
2
–
3
T2 (Tip for port 2)
4
R1 (Ring for port 1)
5
T1 (Tip for port 1)
6
R2 (Ring for port 2)
7
–
8
–
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 5
Issue 5.0
TRUNK BLADES
5.1
CD-4COTA (4 Loop Start Interface)
Figure 4-24 CD-4COTA Blade
5.1.1
Description
The COIU blade provides:
System Hardware Manual
Š
CD-4COTA: Four analog loop start trunk circuits
Š
One trunk status LED
4 - 67
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
One Blade status LED
Š
Four Caller ID Circuits
Š
Two Power Failure Transfer Circuits
Š
Connection for COIDB Daughter Board
The 4COIU blade consumes four trunk ports ranging between ports
001~200. The CN2 connector provides connection to four analog
trunk ports, which are polarity sensitive (tip-to-tip, ring-to-ring).
The power failure circuits (CN3), however, are not polarity sensitive.
Š
Š
Š
The trunk ports are polarity sensitive. Be
careful when wiring the trunks.
When connecting the RJ-61 cables to the
CD-4COTA blades, note the position of the
Power Failure connector (CN3). Do not
confuse this connector as the trunk connector
(CN2).
Do not wire an RJ-11 directly to the
CD-4COTA interface. Use the appropriate
RJ-61 wiring when connecting to the
CD-4COTA.
Table 4-33 CD-4COTA Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the 4COIU blades when they are upgraded.
Table 4-33 CD-4COTA Maximum Upgrade Capacities
4 - 68
19” Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
5
6
23
25
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.1.2
Installation
Install the COIU blade into an available slot in the chassis. (Refer to
Figure 4-24 CD-4COTA Blade on page 4-67 for a layout of the
blade.)
.
5.1.3
If the PZ-4COTE is to be used, install this prior to inserting the CD-4COTA
blade into the chassis.
LED Indications
LED indications for the CD-4COTA are listed in Table 4-34
CD-4COTA LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated
function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-24
CD-4COTA Blade on page 4-67 for the location of the LEDs on the
blades.
Table 4-34 CD-4COTA LED Indications
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
On
Operation Status
Busy LED
(Red)
On
Flash (1s)
System Initializing
On
The assignment of the unit is refused.
Flash (1s)
Trouble found during self-diagnostics.
–
Off
Normal
Operation
On
Unit Busy
Off
–
When you exceed the system
capacity.
When the main software
version is not matched.
On
Flash
(100ms)
Remarks
Off
Flash (100ms
On/Off)
System Hardware Manual
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
Downloading firmware.
–
4 - 69
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.1.4
Connectors
Table 4-35 CD-4COTA RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs on page
4-70 shows the pin-outs for the RJ-61 connector. Refer to Figure
4-24 CD-4COTA Blade on page 4-67 for an illustration showing the
location of the connectors on the 4COIU blades.
Table 4-35 CD-4COTA RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-61 Cable Connector – CN2, Trunks
The CN2 connector is polarity sensitive (tip-to-tip, ring-to-ring).
Pin No.
Connection
1
Circuit 4 – Tip
2
Circuit 3 – Tip
3
Circuit 2 – Tip
4
Circuit 1 – Ring
5
Circuit 1 – Tip
6
Circuit 2 – Ring
7
Circuit 3 – Ring
8
Circuit 4 – Ring
RJ-61 Cable Connector – CN3, SLT Interface for Power Failure
4 - 70
Pin No.
Connection
1
–
2
–
3
Circuit 2 – Tip
4
Circuit 1 – Ring
5
Circuit 1 – Tip
6
Circuit 2 – Ring
7
–
8
–
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.2
Issue 5.0
PZ-4COTE (4 Loop Start Interface Daughter Board)
Figure 4-25 Installing the PZ-4COTE Daughter Board
5.2.1
Description
The PZ-4COTE blade provides:
System Hardware Manual
Š
PZ-4COTE: Four analog loop start trunk circuits
Š
Four Caller ID Circuits
Š
Connector for COIU Blade
Š
Connector for CD-LTA
4 - 71
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The PZ-4COTE consumes four trunk ports ranging between ports
001~200. The CN2 connector provides connection to four analog
trunk ports, which are polarity sensitive (tip-to-tip, ring-to-ring).
The power failure circuits (CN3), however, are not polarity sensitive.
Š
Š
Š
The trunk ports are polarity sensitive. Be
careful when wiring the trunks.
When connecting the RJ-61 cable to the
PZ-4COTE blade, note the position of the
Power Failure connector (CN3). Do not
confuse this connector as the trunk connector
(CN2).
Do not wire an RJ-11 directly to the
CD-4COTA interface. Use the appropriate
RJ-61 wiring when connecting to the
CD-4COTA.
Table 4-36 PZ-4COTE Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the ESIU blades when they are upgraded.
Table 4-36 PZ-4COTE Maximum Upgrade Capacities
4 - 72
19” Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
5
6
23
32
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.2.2
Installation
To install the PZ-4COTE:
5.2.3
1.
Four plastic spacers are included with the COIDB. Install the
plastic spacers on the CD-4COTA or CD-LTA blade. Make sure
to attach the spacers so that they extend out on the side of the
daughter board which has the CN1 connector.
2.
Position the PZ-4COTE CN1 connector over the CN4
connector on the CD-4COTA or CD-LTA. Press the blades
together, ensuring the plastic spacers lock in place.
3.
Install the PZ-4COTE blade (refer to Figure 4-25 Installing the
PZ-4COTE Daughter Board on page 4-71).
Connectors
Table 4-37 PZ-4COTE RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs on page
4-73 shows the pin-outs for the RJ-61 connector. Refer to Figure
4-25 Installing the PZ-4COTE Daughter Board on page 4-71 for an
illustration showing the location of the connectors on the PZ-4COTE
blades.
Table 4-37 PZ-4COTE RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-61 Cable Connector
CN2, Trunks – Connecting to COIU Blade
The CN2 connector is polarity sensitive (tip-to-tip, ring-to-ring).
System Hardware Manual
Pin No.
Connection
1
Circuit 8 – Tip
2
Circuit 7 – Tip
3
Circuit 6 – Tip
4
Circuit 5 – Ring
5
Circuit 5 – Tip
6
Circuit 6 – Ring
7
Circuit 7 – Ring
8
Circuit 8 – Ring
4 - 73
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-37 PZ-4COTE RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs (Continued)
RJ-61 Cable Connector
CN2, Trunks – Connecting to
CD-LTB/CD-LTA Blade
The CN2 connector is polarity sensitive (tip-to-tip, ring-to-ring).
4 - 74
Pin No.
Connection
1
Circuit 4 – Tip
2
Circuit 3 – Tip
3
Circuit 2 – Tip
4
Circuit 1 – Ring
5
Circuit 1 – Tip
6
Circuit 2 – Ring
7
Circuit 3 – Ring
8
Circuit 4 – Ring
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.3
Issue 5.0
CD-2BRIA (2 Basic Rate Interface)
Figure 4-26 CD-2BRIA Blade
5.3.1
Description
This unit is an interface unit that accommodates an ISDN (Basic
Rate) circuit.
The BRI blade provides:
Š
System Hardware Manual
Two (CD-2BRIA) 2-Channel Circuits (2B + D) configured as T-Bus
4 - 75
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
64 Kb/s Clear B-Channel and 16 Kb/s D-Channel
Š
Two Status LEDs
Š
Connector for PZ-2BRIA
These trunk circuits can be connected to either ISDN trunks or ISDN
telephones, depending on the switch setting within system
programming. All ISDN telephone circuits (#1-2 and #3-4 with the
BRI daughter board) are supplied DC power from the system.
The BRI Interface blade uses a single universal slot. Each blade
connects to the network via an NTI Network Termination.
In order to block new calls on the blade, system programming must
be used. This program will prevent new calls from being established
on the blade, but it will not terminate any existing calls.
With the maximum number of blades installed, the following can be
provided:
.
The 2BRI provides 30 BRI circuits and 60 BRI channels.
Table 4-38 CD-2BRIA Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the CD-2BRIA blade when they are
upgraded.
Table 4-38 CD-2BRIA Maximum Upgrade Capacities
5.3.2
19” Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
5
6
23
25
Installation
To install the CD-2BRIA:
4 - 76
1.
Plug the CD-2BRIA blade into the system chassis.
2.
Before proceeding to Step 3, wait to verify that the STATUS
LED starts to flash. (Refer to Figure 4-26 CD-2BRIA Blade on
page 4-75 for the location of the LEDs on the blade.)
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
Š
3.
5.3.3
With normal operation, the status LED
flashes fast. If trouble was found during
the self diagnostics routine, the status LED
flashes slow.
Once connected, the PKG LED will not be
indicated for the status of Layer 1 Link.
Connect the cable from the NT1 Network Termination cable to
the CN7 or CN8 connector on the CD-2BRIA blade and/or
PZ-2BRIA daughter board. (Refer to Figure 4-26 CD-2BRIA
Blade on page 4-75 for the location of the connectors on the
blade.)
LED Indications
LED indications for the CD-2BRIA are listed in Table 4-39 CD-2BRIA
LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and
LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-26 CD-2BRIA Blade
on page 4-75 for the location of the LEDs on the blade.
Table 4-39 CD-2BRIA LED Indications
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
On
Operation Status
Busy LED
(Red)
On
Flash (1s)
System Initializing
On
The assignment of the unit is refused.
Flash (1s)
Trouble found during self-diagnostics.
–
Off
Normal
Operation
On
Unit Busy
Off
–
When you exceed the system
capacity.
When the main software
version is not matched.
On
Flash
(100ms)
Remarks
Off
Flash 80ms
(On/Off) x 3/
400mS off
System Hardware Manual
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
Downloading firmware.
–
4 - 77
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.3.4
Connectors
Table 4-40 CD-2BRIA RJ-45 T-Bus Cable Connector Pin-Outs show
the pin-outs for the RJ-45 cable connector for S-Bus and T-Bus
connections. Refer to Figure 4-26 CD-2BRIA Blade on page 4-75 for
an illustration showing the location of the connectors on the
CD-2BRIA blade.
Table 4-40 CD-2BRIA RJ-45 T-Bus Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-45 Cable Connector – CN2
S-Bus Connection
Pin No.
Connection
1
—
2
—
3
RA
4
TA
5
TB
6
RB
7
—
8
—
RJ-45 Cable Connector – CN7, CN8
T-Bus Connection
Pin No.
Connection
1
2
TA
3
RA
4
RB
5
TB
6
TA
7
8
5.3.5
Termination Switch Settings
When the card is installed it may be necessary to change the
termination switch settings. These are found on the rear of the card,
each circuit has one 8-position DIP switch.
4 - 78
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
The switches 6 and 7 define if the terminators are active. These
should be set to ON, if the bus has no termination. If the bus is
already terminated they may be set to OFF.
Every ISDN-Bus must be terminated with a set of 100Ohm resistors
at its ends. Normally, NT's provide one set as they are assumed to
be at one end of the bus. At the other end of the bus, either the last
socket contains terminators or the attached device provides the
terminators.
The purpose of these terminators is not only to simulate an infinite
line which effectively sinks the signal in that direction. Their main
purpose on ISDN bus lines is to sink the 0's. 1's and 0's are different
in that way that 0's are actively sent to the line, and 1's are just highohmic drivers. So to get rid of the 0's, there must be a load resistor to
discharge the line capacity. If there are no, or too few, terminators,
this does not work.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 79
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.4
PZ-2BRIA (2 Basic Rate Interface Daughter Board)
Figure 4-27 Installing the PZ-2BRIA Daughter Board
4 - 80
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.4.1
Description
This daughter board provides two BRI circuits and is installed on the
CD-2BRIA blade. This board provides:
Š
Two (CD-2BRIA) 2-Channel Circuits (2B + D) configured as T-Bus or
S-Bus
Š
64 Kb/s Clear B-Channel and 16 Kb/s D-Channel
Š
Connection point for CD-2BRIA
Š
Connection point for CD-LTA
These trunk circuits can be connected to ISDN trunks or ISDN
telephones, depending on the switch setting within system
programming. All ISDN telephone circuits [#1-2 (BRI blade) and
#3-4 (with the BRI daughter board)] are supplied DC power from the
UNIVERGE SV8100s systems.
System programming must be used to block new calls on the blade.
This program will prevent new calls from being established on the
blade, but it will not terminate any existing calls.
Table 4-41 PZ-2BRIA Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the CD-2BRIA blade when they are
upgraded.
Table 4-41 PZ-2BRIA Maximum Upgrade Capacities
5.4.2
19” Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
5
6
23
25
Installation
To install the PZ-2BRIA on the CD-2BRIA:
.
1.
System Hardware Manual
Attach the PZ-2BRIA daughter board to the CD-2BRIA blade by lining up the
CN5 connectors and pressing the boards together. (Refer to Figure 4-27
Installing the PZ-2BRIA Daughter Board on page 4-80.)
Install the CD-2BRIA blade into the system chassis.
4 - 81
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.
Before proceeding to Step 3, wait to verify that the STATUS
LED starts to flash.
Š
Š
3.
5.4.3
With normal operation, the status LED
flashes fast. If trouble was found during
the self diagnostics routine, the status
LED flashes slow.
Once connected, the PKG LED will not
be indicated for the status of Layer 1 link.
Connect the cable from the NT1 Network Termination cable to
the CN7 or CN8 connector on the CD-2BRIA and/or PZ-2BRIA
daughter board.
Connectors
Table 4-42 PZ-2BRIA RJ-45 T-Bus Cable Connector Pin-Outs show
the pin-outs for the RJ-45 cable connector for S-Bus and T-Bus
connections. Refer to Figure 4-27 Installing the PZ-2BRIA Daughter
Board on page 4-80 for an illustration showing the location of the
connectors on the PZ-2BRIA daughter board.
Table 4-42 PZ-2BRIA RJ-45 T-Bus Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-45 Cable Connector – CN2
S-Bus Connection
4 - 82
Pin No.
Connection
1
—
2
—
3
RA
4
TA
5
TB
6
RB
7
—
8
—
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 4-42 PZ-2BRIA RJ-45 T-Bus Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-45 Cable Connector – CN7, CN8
T-Bus connection
5.4.4
Pin No.
Connection
1
—
2
—
3
TA
4
RA
5
RB
6
TB
7
—
8
—
Termination Switch Settings
When the card is installed it may be necessary to change the
termination switch settings. These are found on the rear of the card,
each circuit has one 8-position DIP switch.
The switches 6 and 7 define if the terminators are active. These
should be set to ON, if the bus has no termination. If the bus is
already terminated they may be set to OFF.
Every ISDN-Bus must be terminated with a set of 100Ohm resistors
at its ends. Normally, NT's provide one set as they are assumed to
be at one end of the bus. At the other end of the bus, either the last
socket contains terminators or the attached device provides the
terminators.
The purpose of these terminators is not only to simulate an infinite
line which effectively sinks the signal in that direction. Their main
purpose on ISDN bus lines is to sink the 0's. 1's and 0's are different
in that way that 0's are actively sent to the line, and 1's are just highohmic drivers. So to get rid of the 0's, there must be a load resistor to
discharge the line capacity. If there are no, or too few, terminators,
this does not work.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 83
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.5
CD-4DIOPB (DID/OPX Interface)
Figure 4-28 CD-4DIOPB Blade
5.5.1
Description
The CD-4DIOPB supports the analog DID and single line telephone
interface functions (such as Off-Premise Extension). The function
type is assigned in programming for each port. The circuit types,
however, should be grouped together. For example, with three DID
circuits and one OPX circuit, they should be grouped as DID, DID,
DID and OPX and not DID, DID, OPX and DID.
The CD-4DIOPB provides:
4 - 84
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
Four (4DIOPU) DID trunk circuits or four OPX circuits
Š
Two Blade status LEDs
Table 4-43 CD-4DIOPB Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the CD-4DIOPB blades when they are
upgraded.
Table 4-43 CD-4DIOPB Maximum Upgrade Capacities
5.5.2
19” Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
5
6
23
50
Installation
The CD-4DIOPB can be installed in any universal slot.
5.5.3
LED Indications
LED indications for the CD-4DIOPB are listed in Table 4-44
CD-4DIOPB LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated
function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-28
CD-4DIOPB Blade on page 4-84 for the location of the LEDs on the
blade.
Table 4-44 CD-4DIOPB LED Indications
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
On
Operation Status
Busy LED
(Red)
On
Flash (1s)
System Initializing
On
The assignment of the unit is refused.
Flash (1s)
Trouble found during self-diagnostics.
–
Off
Normal
Operation
On
Unit Busy
Off
–
When you exceed the system
capacity.
When the main software
version is not matched.
On
Flash
(100ms)
Remarks
Off
Flash (100ms
On/Off)
System Hardware Manual
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
Downloading firmware.
–
4 - 85
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.5.4
Connectors
The CN2 connector provides connection to four analog DID trunk
ports, which are polarity sensitive (tip-to-tip, ring-to-ring). The
OPX circuits, however, are not polarity sensitive. The DIOPU
requires one universal slot. (Refer to Figure 4-28 CD-4DIOPB Blade
on page 4-84.) If Program 10-03-01 has OPX defined, note that the
blade consumes four (4DIOPU) trunks or eight (8DIOPU) trunks and
extension ports when installed. If OPX is not defined, then only
trunks ports are consumed.
Table 4-45 CD-4DIOPB RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs on page
4-86 shows the pin-outs for the RJ-61 connector. Refer to Figure
4-28 CD-4DIOPB Blade on page 4-84 for an illustration showing the
location of the connectors on the 4DOIPU blade.
Table 4-45 CD-4DIOPB RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-61 Cable Connector – CN2
Line No.
Pin No.
Connection
1
5
Tip
4
Ring
3
Tip
6
Ring
2
Tip
7
Ring
1
Tip
8
Ring
2
3
4
4 - 86
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.6
CD-PRTA (PRI Interface)
Figure 4-29 CD-PRTA Blade (Front and Side View)
5.6.1
Description
The CD-PRTA PRI blade provides an interface for ISDN Primary
Rate Interface (PRI) applications. This blade has a single 30-channel
64Kb per second digital signal circuit configured for PRI. Each
blade connects to the network via an NTI Network Termination.
Each PRI blade provides 32 PRI (30 B & 2 D) channels running at
2.048Mbps with 64Kb/s clear channel. This blade supports the
following PRI services:
System Hardware Manual
4 - 87
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
Basic PRI Call Control (BCC)
Š
Display of incoming caller’s name and number (when allowed by the
telco)
Š
Speech and 3.1 KHz audio
When installed, CD-PRTA uses the first block of 32 consecutive trunk
ports. For example, if a COIU blade is installed for trunks 1~8, the
CD-PRTA automatically uses trunks 9~40. If the COIU blades are
installed for trunks 1~8 and 17~24, CD-PRTA uses trunks 25~56.
The CD-PRTA cannot use trunks 9~16 (even if available) since they
are not part of a consecutive block of 32 trunks. Each CD-PRTA
requires 32 ports in the system, even if not all the ports are used,
otherwise the blade does not function.
The CD-PRTA requires one universal slot.
Table 4-46 CD-PRTA Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the CD-PRTA blades when they are
upgraded.
Table 4-46 CD-PRTA Maximum Upgrade Capacities
5.6.2
19” Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
3
3
6
8
Installation
To install the CD-PRTA:
1.
Plug the CD-PRTA into any universal slot on the chassis.
2.
Use Program 10-51-01 (PRI/T-1) to set the CD-PRTA blade to
either PRI.
With normal operation, LED 1 flashes green.
3.
4 - 88
Connect the cable from the NT1 Network Termination cable to
the CN2 connector on the CD-PRTA. (Refer to Figure 4-30 PRI
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Layout for NT-1 Network on page 4-89 for a cabling diagram.)
Š
Š
The CSU connects to the network through
an 8-pin RJ-45/RJ48C connector. Use
either the RJ48C plug-to-RJ48C plug,
which ships with the CSU or an RJ-45/
48C plug-to RJ-45/48C plug straight
through or CAT5 cable to connect the T1
to the CSU. (Refer to Table 4-50
CD-PRTA RJ48C Connector Pin-outs on
page 4-93.)
With PRI Networking, a cross-over cable
must be used on the master system’s T1/
PRI blade or CSU to the telco
demarcation. If the systems are networked
side by side and not through telco, then a
straight-through cable is used.
Figure 4-30 PRI Layout for NT-1 Network
System Hardware Manual
4 - 89
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.6.3
LED Indications
LED indications for the CD-PRTA are listed in Table 4-47 CD-PRTA
LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and
LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-31 CD-PRTA LED
Indication Pattern of Layer 1 on T1 Unit on page 4-91 for LED pattern
information.
Table 4-47 CD-PRTA LED Indications
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
Operation Status
Busy LED
(Red)
Remarks
On
ON
System Initialising
Flash (1s)
On
The assignment of the unit is refused.
When you exceed the system
capacity.
When the main software
version is not matched.
Flash (1s)
Trouble found during self-diagnostics.
-
On
Normal
Operation
Flash (100mS)
Off
Off
On
Off
Flash
(100ms
On/Off)
4 - 90
Unit Busy
A Channel is busy
(use
another from CH1 ~
CHx).
-
All channels are idle.
--
A Channel is busy
(use
another from CH1 ~
CHx).
-
All channels are idle.
-
Downloading firmware.
-
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 4-31 CD-PRTA LED Indication Pattern of Layer 1 on T1 Unit
Table 4-48 ISDN LED Indications
Alarm
LOS
AIS
Details of the Alarm
Loss of Signal (Red alarm)
No Signam (Analogue
Interface)
Following an alarm blink (red,
green, red, green) a Red LED
will light.
Alarm Indication Signal
(Blue Alarm)
Following an alarm blink (red,
green, red, green) a Red LED
slowly flashes On and Off
twice.
Out Of Frame (Red Alarm)
Following an alarm blink (red,
green, red, green) a Red LED
and Green LED flash On and
Off three times
simultaneously.
Remote Alarm Indication
(Yellow Alarm)
Following an alarm blink (red,
green, red, green) a Green
LED
flashes On and Off twice.
OOF
RAI
No Alarm
System Hardware Manual
LED Indication Pattern
The system does the LED control.
4 - 91
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 4-48 ISDN LED Indications
Alarm
Details of the Alarm
LED Indication Pattern
Note: The order of priority is set up to alarm in the order
LOS>AIS>OOF>RAI.
5.6.4
Connectors
Table 4-49 CD-PRTA RJ-45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs shows the
pin-outs for the RJ-45 connector. Refer to Figure 4-29 CD-PRTA
Blade (Front and Side View) on page 4-87 for an illustration showing
the location of the connectors on the PRIU blade.
Table 4-49 CD-PRTA RJ-45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-45 Cable Connector
S-Bus Connection
Pin No.
Connection
1
RB
2
RA
3
—
4
TB
5
TA
6
—
7
—
8
—
RJ-45 Cable Connector – CN2
T-Bus Connection
4 - 92
Pin No.
Connection
1
RA
2
RB
3
—
4
TA
5
TB
6
—
7
—
8
—
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 4-50 CD-PRTA RJ48C Connector Pin-outs shows the pin-outs
for the 8-pin RJ48C connector for the network and terminal
interfaces.
Table 4-50 CD-PRTA RJ48C Connector Pin-outs
Network Interface
Pinout for the 8-Pin
RJ48C Connector
System Hardware Manual
Terminal Interface
Pinout for the 8-Pin
RJ48C Connector
For connection
to T1 network:
Use AT&T Type
ABAM cable or
equivalent
(individuallyshielded twisted
pair, rated at 100
ohms at 1 MHz).
Pin
No.
Connection
1
RxD (R)
2
RxD (T)
4
TxD (R1)
5
TxD (T1)
No Connection
3, 6
No Connection
No Connection
7, 8
No Connection
Pin
No.
Connection
1
RxD (R1)
2
RxD (T1)
4
TxD (R)
5
TxD (T)
3, 6
7, 8
4 - 93
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.7
CD-4ODTB (4-Port Tie Line Interface Blade)
Figure 4-32 CD-4ODTB Blade
5.7.1
Description
The CD-4ODTB Tie Line blade is an out band dial type analog tie line
interface blade. This blade supports system connections to either 2wire (four lead, tip/ring) or 4-wire (eight lead, tip/ring/tip 1/ring 1)
E&M signalling tie lines (determined in Program 10-13 ). System
programming is also used to select the connection types with Type 1
or Type V. The CD-4ODTB consumes 4 ports ranging between ports
001~200. Each blade requires one universal slot and provides:
Š
4 - 94
Four analog 4-circuit tie line interfaces
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
Two Blade status LEDs
Š
Two straps and one switch per circuit to determine the circuit type
Limitation depends on the connecting Router,
Multiplexer or Exchange. If the UNIVERGE
SV8100 is connected to another UNIVERGE
SV8100 directly, there is up to 1,500 ohms loop
resistance (including system).
Table 4-51 CD-4ODTB Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the ODT blades when they are upgraded.
Table 4-51 CD-4ODTB Maximum Upgrade Capacities
5.7.2
19” Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
5
6
23
50
Installation
Š
Š
System Hardware Manual
When a router or multiplexer is connected
instead of a trunk, the SG terminal of the router
or multiplexer must be connected to the FG
grounding terminal on the UNIVERGE
SV8100 chassis. When a tie line trunk is
connected, the FG terminal must be connected
to the ground. If the FG terminal is not
connected correctly, the signal may fail.
When tie lines are connected to the system, be
careful of the Tip and Ring polarity.
1.
Set the straps for either the 2-wire or 4-wire. Refer to Figure
4-32 CD-4ODTB Blade on page 4-94.
2.
Install the CD-4ODTB into a slot in the chassis.
4 - 95
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.7.3
LED Indications
LED indications for the CD-4ODTB are listed in Table 4-52
CD-4ODTB LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated
function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-32
CD-4ODTB Blade on page 4-94 for the location of the LEDs on the
blade.
Table 4-52 CD-4ODTB LED Indications
LED Indication
Live LED
(Green)
On
Operation Status
Busy LED
(Red)
On
Flash (1s)
System Initializing
On
The assignment of the unit is refused.
Flash (1s)
Trouble found during self-diagnostics.
–
Normal
Operation
Off
On
Unit Busy
Off
–
When you exceed the system
capacity.
When the main software
version is not matched.
On
Flash
(100ms)
Remarks
Off
Flash (100ms
On/Off)
5.7.4
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
A Channel is busy (use
another from CH1 ~ CHx).
–
All channels are idle.
–
Downloading firmware.
–
Connectors
Table 4-53 CD-4ODTB RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs on page
4-97 shows the pin-outs for the RJ-61 connector. Refer to Figure
4-32 CD-4ODTB Blade on page 4-94 for an illustration showing the
location of the connectors on the ODT blade.
4 - 96
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 4-53 CD-4ODTB RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs
RJ-61 Cable Connector – 2-Wire E&M, CN1A~CN1D
Pin No.
Connection
Description
1
—
Not Used
2
M
Control signal to trunk
3
—
Not Used
4
R
Voice signal both ways
5
T
Voice signal both ways
6
—
Not Used
7
E
Control signal from
trunk
8
—
Not Used
RJ-61 Cable Connector – 4-Wire E&M, CN100~CN400
.
Pin No.
Connection
1
—
Not Used
2
M
Control signal to trunk
3
R
Voice signal to trunk
4
R1
Voice signal from trunk
5
T1
Voice signal from trunk
6
T
Voice signal to trunk
7
E
Control signal from
trunk
8
—
Not Used
Using Type I or Type V, a system loopback test can be performed
by connecting E&M1 to E&M2.
<2-Wire E&M>
E&M1
E
M
R
T
System Hardware Manual
Description
→
→
→
→
E&M2
M
E
T
R
<4-Wire E&M>
E&M1
E →
M →
R →
T →
R1 →
E&M2
M
E
T1
R1
T
4 - 97
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.7.5
Connections
Figure 4-33 Voice Signal Connection for Type I And V on page 4-98
and Figure 4-34 Control Signal Connection on page 4-99 show the
signaling methods for circuit types.
Figure 4-33 Voice Signal Connection for Type I And V
4 - 98
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 4-34 Control Signal Connection
System Hardware Manual
4 - 99
Issue 5.0
SECTION 6
UNIVERGE SV8100
OPTIONAL BLADES
6.1
CD-PVAA (Conference Bridge) (Future Enhancement)
Figure 4-35 CD-PVAA Blade
6.1.1
Description
The Packet Voice Application, CD-PVAA blade is an optional
interface that supports Application Packages (Univerge Multimedia
Conference Bridge, and Interactive Voice Response Application).
This blade can be assigned as a CNF package to support Multimedia
Conference Bridge or IVR package to support the Interactive Voice
Response Application supporting a maximum of 16 ports.
4 - 100
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
A digital signal processor/voice processing section handles the
following functions:
Š
DTMF detection
Š
DTMF generation
Š
General tone detection
Š
Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
Basic Support Package
Each blade installed with the CNF or IVR package accounts for up to
16 Extension Ports of the Total Port capacity (One Conference or
One IVR blade maximum).
6.1.2
Installation
To install the CD-PVAA
6.1.3
Š
Install CompactFlash into CD-PVAA.
Š
Plug the into any universal slot on the chassis.
Š
Refer to Program 10-55-01 to configure the IP Address of the
CD-PVAA.
Š
Refer to Program 10-55-04 to configure the Subnet Mask of the
CD-PVAA.
Š
Refer to Program 10-55-05 to configure the Gateway of the CD-PVAA.
Š
The CD-PVAA blade is hot swappable and can be removed from the
chassis without powering down the blade or the SV8100 system.
Š
When the SV8100 requires system reset, this blade comes back on
line.
Switch Settings
The CD-PVAA blade has the following switches:
LOAD Switch SW3
Š
6.1.4
This switch allows the technician to reset the CD-PVAA without having
to remove and reinsert the blade into the chassis.
LED Indications
Active LED – Green
The Active LED is controlled by the DSP and indicates the board
operational status.
System Hardware Manual
Š
Off: Power off
Š
On: Reset
Š
Slow Flash: Board is running but not in sync with the chassis
4 - 101
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
Fast Flash: Board is in sync with the chassis and operating normally
Busy LED – Red
Š
On: Application problem
CompactFlash Card Activity LED – Red
Š
6.1.5
CompactFlash Card Activity LED is controlled by the IDE controller and
indicates read/write activity on the CompactFlash card.
Connectors
Ethernet Connector
This connector is a single 10/100 Mbps Ethernet connector. This port
has Auto-Medium Dependent Interface Crossover (MDIX) to allow
using either a straight-through Ethernet cable for connection to a PC
or a crossover Ethernet cable.
4 - 102
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.2
Issue 5.0
CD-RTB (4-Port )
Figure 4-36 CD-RTB Blade
6.2.1
Description
The Router blade is a 4-port switching hub which complies with the
ethernet specification for both 100Base-TX and 10Base-T. This
blade is compatible in LAN applications using 10Mbps and 100Mbps.
All ports automatically identify and switch 100Base-TX, 10Base-T
and Full/Half Duplex. This blade provides:
Š
System Hardware Manual
Configurable on Each Port: Auto Negotiation/Full Duplex/Half Duplex
4 - 103
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
MDI/MDI-X Auto Crossover
Š
Tag VLAN Based on IEEE802.1Q
Š
Port-Base VLAN
Š
Port Mirroring
Š
PPPoE Client
Š
Multi-Protocol Bridge
Š
RIP/RIPV2/OSPFv2/BGP4
Š
Policy Routing
Š
DHCP
Š
NAT/NAPT
Š
SIP-NAT
Š
IPnP NAT Traversal
Š
DNS Proxy
Š
NTP/SNTP
Š
QoS (PQ, CBQ, LLQ, Shaping)
Š
VPN (IPSec/IKE)
Š
AAA (Login)
Š
Firewall (Static/Dynamic Filter)
Š
SNMPv1
Š
Syslog
Š
TFTP Client
Š
Backpressure/Flow Control Feature
Š
Auto MAC Address Learning/Migrating/Aging
Š
Learn Maximum 8k MAC Addresses
Š
Store and Forward Switching Method
Š
Maximum 100m Transmission Distance by CAT-5 Cable
Š
2 Status LEDs
The VoIPDB, which is required for IP telephones to communicate
with non-VoIP UNIVERGE SV8100 telephones, and place or receive
outside calls, must be connected to either an external switching hub
or to the Router blade.
The blade plugs into a universal slot and does not consume any
ports. Each blade provides eight RJ-45 port connectors. These are
used to connect to LAN terminals. Depending on the type of LAN
4 - 104
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
terminal, the blade may not be able to detect the difference between
straight cable and cross-cable automatically. If auto-crossover is not
functioning, use straight cable for that terminal connection.
Table 4-54 CD-RTB Maximum Upgrade Capacities provides the
maximum capacities for the ESIU blades when they are upgraded.
Table 4-54 CD-RTB Maximum Upgrade Capacities
19” Chassis
with CPU
19” Chassis
without CPU
19” Chassis
x4
Networked
Chassis
1
2
8
50
The Router blade can also be used to provide power over category 5
network cables. This eliminates installing separate power adapters
for each IP telephone and it allows for centralized power backup.
6.2.2
Installation
To install the CD-RTB:
6.2.3
1.
Plug the CD-RTB blade into any universal slot.
2.
Refer to the Univerge SV8100 Programming Manual for
required programming.
LED Indications
LED indications for the CD-RTB are indicated in Table 4-55 CD-RTB
LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and
LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-36 CD-RTB Blade on
page 4-103 for the location of the LEDs on the blade.
Table 4-55 CD-RTB LED Indications
LED
CN2, CN3
LINK/ACT
CN2, CN3
10/100
System Hardware Manual
Function
LAN
Operation
Status
LAN Speed
Status
LED Status
Operation
Status
Comments
Green On
Link Established
Individually for
Ports 1~8
Green
Flashing
Communicating
Data
Individually for
Ports 1~8
Green Off
Not Activated
Individually for
Ports 1~8
Orange On
100Mbps
Individually for
Ports 1~8
Orange Off
10Mbps
Individually for
Ports 1~8
4 - 105
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.3
CD-ETIA (Gigabit PoE Switch)
Figure 4-37 CD-ETIA Blade
6.3.1
Description
The CD-ETIA blade is a managed 8-port gigabit ethernet PoE switch.
Ports 1 and 8 are the default uplink ports. All the user management
and stacking is based on this setup. This blade provides:
4 - 106
Š
8 Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000) Ports
Š
Per Port Status LED Indicating Link, Speed and Activity
Š
802.3af PoE on All Ports Providing up to 15.4W of Power
- Selectable level per port via web-based management interface
Š
Auto-MDI/MDI-X Auto Crossover (when auto-negotiation is available)
Š
Layer 2 Switching
Š
QoS
Š
802.1Q VLANs
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
6.3.2
Š
802.1p Priority Queuing
Š
Port Mirroring
Š
802.3x Flow Control
Š
Independent VLAN Learning Support
Š
TCP/IP Networking Stack
Š
Multi-Unit Stacking (multiple blades in a system are managed from the
same user interface)
Š
Dynamic PoE Control (allows setting the proper PoE classifications for
each port to stay within the system power budget)
Š
Switch Management Through Web-Based GUI
Š
Software Upgrades Via TFTP
Installation
6.3.2.1
Stacking Architecture
The idea of stacking is to allow the user the ability to
manage the multiple GSWU cards in one system as one
switch, instead of individual units and IP addresses, etc. For
example, a set of three blades would appear to the UI as a
24 port switch instead of three 8-port switches. The stacking
will work by assigning a Master Management Card which
provides all the GUI information for all the blades in the
same stack. The CCPU assigns the Master by issuing an IP
address via PAW/PRW. All other GSWU cards detected in
the system are not assigned an IP address signifying them
as Slave blades.
A single system can have up to 12 GSWU cards per system.
However, only three GSWU units can be grouped together
forming a single 20 port switch. When more than three
GSWU units are present within a system, the additional
units will not have any of the software features specified in
this document. They will behave as an unmanaged Gigabit
Ethernet switch, as defined later in this document.
The three GSWU boards can be categorized into one Main
board, with two additional Add-on boards.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 107
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.3.2.2
CD-CP00IP Address Assignment
The GSWU Main board will be provided with an IP address
from the back plane CPU during the initialization sequence.
The provision of an IP address from the back plane will
identify the Main board. If during initialization, the IP address
is set to 0 by the CPU, the blade is then determined to be an
Add-on.
The IP address for the GSWU is assigned in Program 10-55
on the system. It contains the settings for the IP Address,
Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address.
6.3.2.3
Group Formation
When a GSWU determines that it is an Add-on board due to
the lack of an IP address from the backplane, it sends a
broadcast P2P message (defined in separate
documentation) to all the GSWU units in the system until it
receives an acknowledge message from the Main board.
The Main board receiving this broadcast message will
acknowledge by sending port identification information to
the Add-on board.
6.3.2.4
Port Number Determination
When a Main board is initialized, the board assigns the first
eight ports as port 1 ~ 8. When subsequent Add-on boards’
broadcast messages are received, the Main board assigns
port numbers on a first come, first serve basis.
To have deterministic port assignment, it is recommended the
the Add-on boards be inserted sequentially starting with the
desired lower port numbers first.
.
When a board is removed, the port numbers are not
automatically removed. The operator, however, can remove
any assignment by accessing the Main board GUI.
Example:
Main board is inserted in slot 3, one Add-on board inserted
in slot 5. Main board has ports 1 ~ 8; Add-on board has ports
9 ~ 16.
1. User inserts a new Add-on board in slot 2.
Š
4 - 108
The new board gets assigned ports 17 ~ 24.
Installing the SV8100 Blades
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
2. User removes Add-on board and moves it to slot 6.
Š
The re-inserted board automatically gets ports
17 ~ 24 (9 ~ 16 are unavailable).
.
User can erase the ports 9 ~ 16.
.
Then reinsert the board in slot 6 to get ports 9 ~ 16.
3. User relocates the Main board to slot 4.
Š
None of the port numbers change. However, the
programming in Program 10-55 must be changed to
reflect this move.
The grouping of the three GSWU units to form a 20 port
switch is restricted to reside in a single system location. The
grouping is not allowed where the GSWU units are placed
as part of the NetLink feature in the Univerge SV8100
system.
6.3.2.5
Unmanaged Switch Functions
In the unmanaged mode, a GSWU unit will have the
following functions only:
6.3.3
Š
10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (x8)
Š
PoE Class 3 (lowest power class)
LED Indications
Table 4-56 CD-ETIA LED Indications
Port State
6.3.4
LED Display
1000Mbps Link
Green Solid
10/100Mbps Link
Yellow Solid
No Link
Off
Port Activity
LED Blinking
Connectors
Backplane Connector – J1 connection to system CPU board and
other boards in the chassis.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 109
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
- - NOTES - -
4 - 110
Installing the SV8100 Blades
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL)
Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
SECTION 1
This chapter provides information about the DT300/DT700 Series digital
and IP terminals in addition to the single line telephones, cordless
telephones and wireless telephones.
Table 5-1 Terminal Category Reference Chart
DT300/DT700 Series Terminals
Category
Equipment ID
Digital
Terminal
DT310
Economy
DT330
Value
IP Terminal
DT710
Economy
DT730
Value
DT750
Sophi
Wireless
Handset
Product Name (idea)
5
Note
2-button without LCD
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–
6-button with LCD
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–
12-button with LCD
DTL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
–
24-button with LCD
DTL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
–
32-button with LCD
DTL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
24-button + 8-button LK Unit
DESI-less
DTL-8LD(BK)/(WH) TEL
–
12-Button with BCH
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
With Bluetooth Cordless Handset
12-button with PSA
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
with Power Save Adapter (PSA)
2-button without LCD
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–
6-button with LCD
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–
DESI-Less
ITL-8LDE-(BK)
12-button with LCD
ITL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
–
24-button with LCD
ITL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
–
32-button with LCD
ITL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
24-button + 8-button LK Unit
DESI-less
ITL-8LD-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
–
12-button with PSA
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
with Power Save Adapter (PSA)
32-button
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
with large color touch LCD
C124
SIP DECT
G955
SIP DECT
System Hardware Manual
Chapter
5-1
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The DT300/DT700 Series offers a line up of modular telephones. This modular
design allows the telephones to be upgraded and customized. Optional LCD panels,
keypads, handset cradles, face plates and colored side panels can easily be snapped
on and off.
The easy-to-use adjustable footplate allows for a variety of height positions.
There are several easy-to-read LCD displays available, including a new large color
touch panel LCD.
The following tables list each terminal and the options available.
Table 5-2 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility show the compatibility between the
terminals and adapter used in the system.
Table 5-2 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility
Adapter Unit
Terminal
ADA-L
APR-L
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
ITL-8LD-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
ITL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
ILPA
PSA-L
IP Terminals:
–—
–—
3
3
3
3
3
–—
3
3
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
3
–—
3
3
ITL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
–—
3
3
ITL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
–—
3
3
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
3
–—
3
3
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
DTL-8LD(BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
–—
3
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
DTL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
–—
3
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
3
3
–—
3
DTL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
–—
3
–—
–—
3
Digital Terminals:
5-2
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 5-2 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (Continued)
Adapter Unit
Terminal
ADA-L
APR-L
ILPA
PSA-L
3
3
–—
3
–—
–—
–—
–—
DTL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
Console:
DCL-60-1 (BK)/(WH) CONSOLE
–— = Option Not Available
3 = Optional Available
Table 5-3 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility
Line Key/LCD
Terminal
8 LK-L
8LKD(LD)-L
8LKI(LD)-L
12LK-L
LCD (BL-L
DCL-60
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
ITL-8LD-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
–—
–—
–—
–—
3
ITL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
–—
3
3
3
3
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
3
–—
3
3
3
3
ITL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
–—
3
–—
3
3
ITL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
–—
3
–—
3
–—
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
3
–—
–—
–—
3
3
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
DTL-8LD(BK)/(WH) TEL
3
–—
–—
–—
–—
3
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
DTL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
–—
3
3
3
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
3
3
–—
3
3
3
DTL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
–—
–—
3
3
IP Terminals:
Digital Terminals:
System Hardware Manual
5-3
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-3 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (Continued)
Line Key/LCD
Terminal
DTL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
8 LK-L
8LKD(LD)-L
8LKI(LD)-L
12LK-L
LCD (BL-L
DCL-60
3
3
–—
–—
3
–—
–— = Option Not Available
3 = Optional Available
5-4
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 5-4 Terminal and Tenkey Kit Compatibility
Tenkey Kit
Terminal
BS(F)-L
BS(S)-L
BS(ACD)-L
BS(Braille)-L
BS(Retro)-l
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
3
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
3
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
–—
ITL-8LD-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
ITL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
ITL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
ITL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
3
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
–—
–—
–—
3
DTL-8LD(BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
DTL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
DTL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
DTL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
IP Terminals:
Digital Terminals:
–— = Option Not Available
3 = Optional Available
System Hardware Manual
5-5
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-5 Terminal and Optional Equipment Compatibility
Equipment
Terminal
PSA-L
WM-L*
PANEL-L
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–—
3
3
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
3
3
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
3
3
ITL-8LD-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
ITL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
–—
3
3
ITL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
ITL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
3
3
3
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
–—
3
3
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
–—
3
3
DTL-8LD(BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
3
3
IP Terminals:
Digital Terminals:
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
–—
3
3
DTL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
DTL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
3
3
3
–—
3
–—
Console:
DCL-60-1 CONSOLE **
–— = Option Not Available
3 = Optional Available
* The WM-L is required if the ADA-L UNIT or APR-L UNIT are installed on the
telephone.
** DCL-60-1 = Special Wall Mount
5-6
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 2
Issue 5.0
DT300 SERIES DIGITAL MULTILINE TERMINALS
The DT300 Series offers a new exciting line up of digital telephones. These
telephones (except economy), have a modular design that allows the telephones to
be upgraded and customized. Optional LCD panels, dial pads, feature key kits,
handset cradles, face plates and colored side panels can easily be snapped on and
off to upgrade and customize as the customer desires.
2.1
Digital MultilineTerminals
2.1.1
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
This digital economy non-display Multiline Terminal has two
programmable line keys and is available in black only. The terminal
features:
Š
Non-modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Half-duplex speaker phone
Š
Two line keys (Red, Green)
Š
Four soft keys (Help, Exit)
Š
Three color LED
Figure 5-1 DTL-2E-1 TEL
System Hardware Manual
5-7
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.1.2
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
This digital economy Multiline Terminal has six line keys with display
and is available in black only. The terminal features:
Š
Non-modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Half-duplex speaker phone
Š
Six line keys (Red, Green)
Š
Four soft keys (Help, Exit)
Š
Three color LED
Š
24 X 3 character LCD display with cursor keys
Figure 5-2 DTL-6DE-1 TEL
2.1.3
DTL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL/DTL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
This digital value Multiline Terminal has eight line keys with display
and is available in both black and white. The terminal features:
5-8
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Eight line keys (Red, Green)
Š
Four soft keys (Help, Exit)
Š
DESI-less line key displays eight lines per page (four pages of eight
lines available using scroll key)
Š
Three color LED
Š
Two 168 X 55 dot matrix backlit LCDs with cursor keys
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Figure 5-3 DTL-8LD-1 TEL
2.1.4
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
This digital value Multiline Terminal has 12 line keys and is available
in black only. The terminal features:
System Hardware Manual
Š
Keyset-like Handset
Š
Eight Line Buttons
Š
Function Button
Š
Dial Button
Š
Display
Š
All Keyset Functions with Main Unit
Š
Cradle Charges Handset
Š
Base Side RF Block (50 meters, Class 1)
Š
Bluetooth Distance: 50 Meters
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
5-9
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
Figure 5-4 DTL-12BT-1 TEL
2.1.5
DTL-12D-1 (BK) TEL/DTL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
This digital value Multiline Terminal has 12 line keys and is available
in both black and white. The terminal features:
5 - 10
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Eight line keys (Red, Green)
Š
Four soft keys (Help, Exit)
Š
Three color LED
Š
168 X 58 dot matrix backlit LCD with cursor keys
Š
Menu/Softkey operation provided on the LCD
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 5-5 DTL-12D-1 TEL
2.1.6
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
This digital value multiline terminal with Analog Power Failure
adapter has 12 line keys and is available in black only. The terminal
features:
System Hardware Manual
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Eight line keys (Red, Green)
Š
Four soft keys (Help, Exit)
Š
Three color LED
Š
168 X 58 dot matrix backlit LCD with cursor keys
Š
Menu/Softkey operation provided on the LCD
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Š
PSA-L adapter
5 - 11
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-6 DTL-12PA-1 TEL
2.1.7
DTL-24D-1 (BK) TEL/DTL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
This digital value Multiline Terminal has 24 line keys and is available
in both black and white. The terminal features:
5 - 12
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Eight line keys (Red, Green)
Š
Four soft keys (Help, Exit)
Š
Three color LED
Š
168 X 58 dot matrix backlit LCD with cursor keys
Š
Menu/Softkey operation provided on the LCD
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 5-7 DTL-24D-1 TEL
2.1.8
DTL-32D-1 (BK) TEL/DTL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
This digital value Multiline Terminal has 32 line keys (24 line keys
plus eight line key LK Unit) and is available in both black and white.
The terminal features:
System Hardware Manual
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Eight line keys (Red, Green)
Š
Four soft keys (Help, Exit)
Š
Three color LED
Š
168 X 58 dot matrix backlit LCD with cursor keys
Š
Menu/Softkey operation provided on the LCD
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
5 - 13
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-8 DTL-32D-1 TEL
5 - 14
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 3
Issue 5.0
DT700 SERIES IP MULTILINE TERMINALS
The DT700 Series offers a new exciting line up of IP telephones. These telephones
(except economy), have a modular design that allows the telephones to be upgraded
and customized. Optional LCD panels, dial pads, feature key kits, handset cradles,
face plates and colored side panels can easily be snapped on and off to upgrade and
customize as the customer desires.
3.1
IP MultilineTerminals
3.1.1
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
This IP economy non-display Multiline Terminal has two
programmable line keys and is available in black only. The terminal
features:
Š
Non-modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Three color LED
Š
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Š
XML open interface (limited)
Š
10Base-T/100Base-TX network interface
Š
Remote Login and Maintenance
Figure 5-9 ITL-2E-1 TEL
System Hardware Manual
5 - 15
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.1.2
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
This IP economy Multiline Terminal has six line keys with display and
is available in black only. The terminal features:
Š
Non-modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Remote login and maintenance
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Three color LED for message waiting
Š
168 X 41 full dot black and white LCD with cursor keys
Š
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Š
XML open interface (limited)
Š
10Base-T/100Base-TX network interface
Figure 5-10 ITL-6DE-1 TEL
3.1.3
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
This IP value Multiline Terminal has eight line keys with display and
is available in both black only. The terminal features:
5 - 16
Š
Non-Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
DESI-less line key displays eight lines
Š
Function key changes from HOME to DESI-Less screen
Š
Three-colour LED for message waiting
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
224 x 96 dot matrix gray scale backlit LCD
Š
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Š
XML open interface (limited)
Š
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX network interface
Š
Wide Band Handset
Figure 5-11 ITL-8LDE-1 TEL
3.1.4
ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
This IP value Multiline Terminal has eight line keys with display and
is available in both black and white. The terminal features:
System Hardware Manual
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
DESI-less line key displays eight lines per page (four pages of eight
lines available using scroll key)
Š
Protection button (lock)
Š
Seven color LED for incoming calls
Š
Two 224 X 96 full dot gray scale LCDs with cursor keys
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Š
Wideband handset
Š
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Š
XML open interface
Š
10Base-T/100Base-TX network interface
5 - 17
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
Backlit LCD
Figure 5-12 ITL-8LD-1 TEL
3.1.5
ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
This IP value Multiline Terminal has 12 line keys and is available in
both black and white. The terminal features:
5 - 18
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Protection button
Š
Seven color LED for incoming calls
Š
224 X 96 full dot gray scale LCD with cursor keys
Š
Menu/Softkey operation provided on the LCD
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Š
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Š
XML open interface
Š
10Base-T/100Base-TX network interface
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
Backlit LCD
Figure 5-13 ITL-12D-1 TEL
3.1.6
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
This IP value Multiline Terminal with Analog Power Failure adapter
has 12 line keys and is available in black only. The terminal features:
System Hardware Manual
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Protection button
Š
Seven color LED for incoming calls
Š
224 X 96 full dot gray scale LCD with cursor keys
Š
Menu/Softkey operation provided on the LCD
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Š
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Š
XML open interface
Š
10Base-T/100Base-TX network interface
Š
Backlit LCD
5 - 19
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
PSA Adapter for Power Failure
Figure 5-14 ITL-12PA-1 TEL
3.1.7
ITL-24D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
This IP value Multiline Terminal has 24 line keys and is available in
both black and white. The terminal features:
5 - 20
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Protection button
Š
Seven color LED for incoming calls
Š
224 X 96 full dot gray scale LCD with cursor keys
Š
Menu/Softkey operation provided on the LCD
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Š
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Š
XML open interface
Š
10Base-T/100Base-TX network interface
Š
Backlit LCD
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 5-15 ITL-24D-1 TEL
3.1.8
ITL-32D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
This IP value Multiline Terminal has 32 line keys (24 line keys plus an
eight line key LK Unit) and is available in both black and white. The
terminal features:
System Hardware Manual
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Protection button
Š
Seven color LED for incoming calls
Š
224 X 96 full dot gray scale LCD with cursor keys
Š
Menu/Softkey operation provided on the LCD
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Š
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Š
XML open interface
Š
10Base-T/100Base-TX network interface
Š
Backlit LCD
5 - 21
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-16 ITL-32D-1 TEL
3.1.9
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
This IP Multiline Terminal features a large color touch panel LCD and
is available in black only. The terminal features:
5 - 22
Š
Modular design
Š
Four step adjustable base
Š
Full-duplex speaker phone
Š
Protection button
Š
Seven color LED for incoming calls
Š
Large touch color LCD
Š
Menu/Softkey operation provided on the LCD
Š
Backlit 10-key dial pad for easy viewing
Š
Full-duplex handsfree operation
Š
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Š
XML open interface
Š
10Base-T/100Base-TX network interface
Š
Backlit LCD
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 5-17 ITL-320C-1 TEL
System Hardware Manual
5 - 23
Issue 5.0
SECTION 4
UNIVERGE SV8100
INSTALL MULTILINE TERMINALS
4.1
Connecting the DT300 Series Multiline Terminal to the System
This instruction applies to all DT300 Series Multiline Terminals.
1.
Plug the telephone cord into the modular jack on the bottom side of the
Multiline Terminal. The handset is also attached to the bottom side of
the Multiline Terminal.
Handset
Multiline Terminal
Line
Headset
Figure 5-18 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System
5 - 24
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
2.
Lead the Line and Handset cables through the applicable grooves.
Groove for Line and Handset Cables
Figure 5-19 Leading Line Cords on a Multiline Terminal
4.2
Applying Power to the DT700 Multiline Terminals
The DT700 terminals support two different methods to power the terminal:

AC-2R/AC-3R
Plug the optional AC-2R/AC-3R AC Adapter input Jack in the terminal
base unit, and plug the wall plug of the AC Adapter in a standard 230
Vac wall outlet.

In-Line Power/PoE (Power over Ethernet)
In-Line Power (sometimes called Power Over Ethernet) is a LAN
technology that allows standard 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX data cables to
pass electrical current from a power source to a requesting end device.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 25
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.3
Connecting the IP Multiline Terminal to the Network and PC
These instructions for connecting an IP Multiline Terminal to the Network and
PC apply to DT700 Multiline Terminals. Refer to Figure 5-20 IP Terminal
Connector Locations.
1.
Connect the LAN Network 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable to the LAN (=)
connector.
2.
The IP terminal has a switching HUB to connect a PC to the LAN
Network. Connect the 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX straight cable used for
this connection to the PC(x) connector and to the PC.
Refer to Figure 5-21 Typical Network IP Connection on page 5-27.
LAN (=) PC(x)
Connections
Figure 5-20 IP Terminal Connector Locations
5 - 26
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 5-21 Typical Network IP Connection
4.4
Adjusting the LCD on the Multiline Terminal
DT300/DT700 Series display Multiline Terminals have an adjustable Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD). The LCD can be adjusted by pulling up or pushing
down as desired.
Figure 5-22 Adjusting the LCD on a Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
5 - 27
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.5
Installing Line Key Kit (12LK-L KIT)
The 12LK-L KIT Provides twelve additional buttons to ITL or DTL multiline
terminals. The 12LK-L KIT kit:

Mounts directly to top side of terminal

Supports Red and Green LED colors
Figure 5-23 12LK-L Kit
4.5.1
Installing the 12LK-L KIT
To prevent possible damage to the 12LK-L KIT or
the DTL/ITL multiline terminal during installation
or removal, disconnect the line cord/LAN cable
and the AC/DC adapter from the DTL/ITL
multiline terminal.
1.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
.
5 - 28
Only one 12LK-L KIT can be attached to the DTL/ITL multiline
terminal.
2.
Pry the right-side panel from the multiline terminal.
3.
From the lower left or right corner, pry the Line Key Panel from
the multiline terminal (refer to Figure 5-24 Removing the Line
Key Panel on page 5-29).
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Line Key
Panel
Figure 5-24 Removing the Line Key Panel
4.
Lift and remove the DESI sheet.
DESI Sheet
Figure 5-25 Removing the DESI Sheet
5.
System Hardware Manual
Press the right end of the Line Key placeholder and lift to
remove (refer to Figure 5-26 Removing the Line Key
Placeholder on page 5-30).
5 - 29
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Press here
then Lift
Figure 5-26 Removing the Line Key Placeholder
6.
Install the 12LK-L KIT and press down until click is heard.
12LK-L KIT
Figure 5-27 Installing the 12LK-L KIT
5 - 30
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
7.
If desired, print and install the new DESI sheet.
Figure 5-28 Installing the DESI Sheet
8.
Install the supplied Line Key Panel (refer to Figure 5-29
Installing the Line Key Panel).
Line Key
Panel
Figure 5-29 Installing the Line Key Panel
System Hardware Manual
9.
Install the side panel.
10.
Connect the line cord/LAN cable and the AC/DC adapter to the
DTL/ITL multiline terminal.
5 - 31
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.5.2
Configuring the Digital Telephone for the Correct Number of Line
Keys
1.
With the telephone not plugged in and the handset on-hook,
press the 4 and 6 buttons on the numbered keypad and
connect the telephone cable.
This places the telephone into Service Class R/W mode. The MW LED
should be lit.
.
2.
Press 1 to enter the Line Key Type mode.
The MW LED should flash.
.
3.
Follow the directions below for the type of line key module
installed:
Table 5-6 Numbered Keypad Type
Numbered Keypad Type
4.5.3
5 - 32
Push
2-Button
1
6-Button
2
8-Button
3
12-Button
4
24-Button
5
4.
Save to memory by pressing line key 2, 8, 14 or 20. The display
changes back to the Service Class R/W mode and the MW
LED will be lit Red.
5.
Press Exit to return the telephone to the idle condition.
Configuring the IP Telephone for the Correct Number of Line Keys
1.
Enter the terminal’s program mode by pressing HOLD CONF
#.
2.
At the Login screen, enter the user name (default = ADMIN)
and password (default = 6633222) and press the OK Soft Key.
3.
Press Soft Key 3 for Maintenance Setting.
4.
Press Soft Key 4 for Adjust.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.
Press Soft Key 2 for Key Kit Type.
6.
Select the type of keypad kit being used by pressing the Up/
Down key.
Table 5-7 Keypad Kit Type
Keypad Kit Entry
Description
Kit1
Type A – Japan with cursor key
Kit2
Type A – US with cursor key
Kit3
Type B – US with cursor key
Kit4
Kit8
32 Line Key without cursor key
Kit9
Type A – Japan without cursor key
Kit10
Type A – US without cursor key
Kit11
Type B – US without cursor key
Kit12
7.
Press Soft Key 4 for Next.
8.
Select the type of line key kit being used by pressing the Up/
Down key.
.
By default, the correct line key kit for the keypad kit selected above
will be highlighted.
Table 5-8 Line Key Kit Type
Line Key Kit Entry
Kit12
Enhanced 12-Button
Kit24
Enhanced 24-Button
Kit32
Enhanced 32-Button
Kit8
DESI-Less
Kit6
Value 6-Button
Kit2
Value 2-Button
Kit0
IP-CTS
9.
System Hardware Manual
Description
Press Soft Key 4 for OK to complete.
5 - 33
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
10.
4.6
Continue pressing Soft Key 4 to exit (Exit-Exit-Save). The
terminal will reset automatically.
Installing the Directory Card on the Multiline Terminal
A directory card can be attached to DT300/DT700 Series Multiline Terminals.
The directory card can be used to record often dialed numbers or other
important information.
1.
After recording the information on the lined insert, reinsert it between the
plastic panels of the directory card. Attach the directory card to the
directory card holder as illustrated in Figure 5-30 Attaching Directory
Card to Directory Card Holder. Note that the open end slides into the
directory card holder.
Directory Card
Directory Card
Holder
Figure 5-30 Attaching Directory Card to Directory Card Holder
2.
Locate the two grooves on the top of the telephone as illustrated in
Figure 5-31 Attaching Directory Card Holder to the Multiline Terminal.
Push the directory card holder into the grooves on the Multiline Terminal
until they snap into place.
.
5 - 34
To remove the directory card, press the two sides of the directory card holder
inward until the tabs release and pull the holder out of the grooves.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Multiline Terminal
Grooves
Directory Card
Holder
Figure 5-31 Attaching Directory Card Holder to the Multiline Terminal
4.7
Installing a Numbered Keypad on the Multiline Terminal
The BS( )-L Kits are keypad sets, which can be installed on a multiline
terminal replacing the Standard Numbered Keypad. The Dterm Series i Retro
is an optional keypad available to be used with the IPK II and IPS terminals.

Standard Numbered Keypad
The standard keypad (in black or white), is commonly delivered with the
UNIVERGE SV8100 terminal (refer to Figure 5-32 Standard Numbered
Keypad on page 5-36).
System Hardware Manual
5 - 35
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-32 Standard Numbered Keypad

BS (Retro)-L KIT
The optional Retro keypad (in black or white), is compatible with the
Dterm Series i telephone, allowing the terminal to be used with the IPK II,
IPC 500 and IPS multiline terminals.
Figure 5-33 BS (Retro)-L KIT
5 - 36
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.7.1
Installing the Numbered Keypad on a Multiline Terminal
To prevent possible damage to the Numbered
Keypad or the DTL/ITL multiline terminal during
installation or removal, disconnect the line cord/
LAN cable and the AC/DC adapter from the DTL/
ITL multiline terminal.
1.
Remove the plastic panels. (Refer to paragraph Figure 5-34
Remove Plastic Panels.)
Line Key
Panel
Numbered
Keypad
Panel
Desi Printer
Sheet
Figure 5-34 Remove Plastic Panels
2.
Pull down on the tab and lift the Numbered Keypad away from
the telephone to remove the existing button. See Figure 5-35
Removing Numbered Keypad from DT300/DT700 Series
Terminal.
Figure 5-35
System Hardware Manual
Removing Numbered Keypad from DT300/DT700
Series Terminal
5 - 37
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Slide the replacement numbered keypad into the grooves
located on the inside of the telephone, then press down on the
keypad to snap it into place. See Figure 5-36 Install New
Numbered Keypad into DT300/DT700 Series Terminal.
Figure 5-36
4.
Install New Numbered Keypad into DT300/
DT700 Series Terminal
Insert the DESI printer sheet and plastic panels on the multiline
terminal. Refer to Figure 5-37 Install Plastic Panels.
Line Key
Panel
Numbered
Keypad
Panel
Desi Printer
Sheet
Figure 5-37 Install Plastic Panels
5 - 38
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.7.2
Configuring the Digital Telephone for the Numbered Keypad
1.
With the telephone not plugged in and the handset on-hook,
press the 4 and 6 buttons on the numbered keypad and
connect the telephone cable.
This places the telephone into Service Class R/W mode. The MW LED
should be lit.
.
2.
Press 2 on the numbered keypad to enter the Button Kit mode.
The MW LED should flash.
.
3.
Follow the directions below for the type of keypad installed:
Table 5-9 Numbered Keypad Type
Numbered Keypad Type
Push
LED Indication
Japanese
01
Line 1 LED on Red
Model A Telephone
02
Line 2 LED on Red
Model B UX5000 Telephone
03
Line 1 and 2 LED on Red
Call Center
04
Line 1 LED on Green
Hotel-1
05
Line 2 LED on Green
Hotel-2
06
Line 1 and 2 LED on Green
Retirement Home
07
Line 1 LED flashing Red
Japan 32-Button
08
Line 2 LED flashing Red
Japan Value
09
Line 1 and 2 LED flashing Red
Model A Value (retro)
10
Line 1 LED flashing Green
Model B Value
11
Line 2 LED flashing Green
Reserve
12
Line 1 and 2 LED flashing Green
4.7.3
4.
Save to memory by pressing line key 2, 8, 14 or 20. The display
changes back to the Service Class R/W mode and the MW
LED will be lit Red.
5.
Press Exit to return the telephone to the idle condition.
Configuring the IP Telephone for the Numbered Keypad
1.
System Hardware Manual
Enter the terminal’s program mode by pressing HOLD CONF
#.
5 - 39
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2.
At the Login screen, enter the user name (default = ADMIN)
and password (default = 6633222) and press the OK Soft Key.
3.
Press Soft Key 3 for Maintenance Setting.
4.
Press Soft Key 4 for Adjust.
5.
Press Soft Key 2 for Key Kit Type.
6.
Select the type of keypad kit being used by pressing the Up/
Down key.
Table 5-10 Keypad Kit Type
Keypad Kit Entry
Description
Kit1
Type A – Japan with cursor key
Kit2
Type A – US with cursor key
Kit3
Type B – US with cursor key
Kit4
Kit8
32 Line Key without cursor key
Kit9
Type A – Japan without cursor key
Kit10
Type A – US without cursor key
Kit11
Type B – US without cursor key
Kit12
7.
Press Soft Key 4 for Next.
8.
Select the type of line key kit being used by pressing the Up/
Down key.
By default, the correct line key kit for the keypad kit selected above
will be highlighted.
.
Table 5-11 Line Key Kit Type
Line Key Kit Entry
5 - 40
Description
Kit12
Enhanced 12-Button
Kit24
Enhanced 24-Button
Kit32
Enhanced 32-Button
Kit8
DESI-Less
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 5-11 Line Key Kit Type (Continued)
Line Key Kit Entry
4.8
Description
Kit6
Value 6-Button
Kit2
Value 2-Button
Kit0
IP-CTS
9.
Press Soft Key 4 for OK to complete.
10.
Continue pressing Soft Key 4 to exit (Exit-Exit-Save). The
terminal will reset automatically.
Adjusting the Height on the Multiline Terminal
The height of the DT300/DT700 Series Multiline terminals can be adjusted by
moving the legs attached to the bottom of the terminal.
1.
Turn telephone over (button side down).
2.
Adjust legs to desired height (refer to Figure 5-38 Adjust Height of
DT300/DT700 Series Terminal on page 5-41).
Figure 5-38 Adjust Height of DT300/DT700 Series Terminal
3.
System Hardware Manual
Turn telephone over (button side up).
5 - 41
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.9
Removing or Installing the Tilt Legs on the Multiline Terminal
The Tilt Legs can be removed or installed on the DT300/DT700 Series
multiline terminal.
4.9.1
Remove Tilt Legs
1.
Place the telephone on a flat surface (button side down).
2.
Separate the Tilt Legs and place them flat against the
telephone. See Figure 5-39 Separating the Tilt Legs.
Figure 5-39 Separating the Tilt Legs
3.
Push downward (two arrows) and slide downward (refer to
Figure 5-40 Attach Tilt Legs to DT300/DT700 Series Terminal.
Figure 5-40 Attach Tilt Legs to DT300/DT700 Series Terminal
5 - 42
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.
4.9.2
Lift and remove the Tilt Legs.
Install Tilt Legs
1.
Place the telephone on a flat surface (button side down).
2.
Lay the adjustable Tilt legs on top of the telephone. See Figure
5-41 Attach Tilt Legs to DT300/DT700 Series Terminal.
Figure 5-41 Attach Tilt Legs to DT300/DT700 Series Terminal
System Hardware Manual
3.
Push the Tilt Legs upward until they snap into place.
4.
Lift both ends of Tilt Legs until they come together (refer to
Figure 5-42 Connecting the Tilt Legs on page 5-44).
5 - 43
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-42 Connecting the Tilt Legs
5.
Snap legs together and adjust to desired height. See Figure
5-43 Adjust Height of DT300/DT700 Series Terminal).
Figure 5-43 Adjust Height of DT300/DT700 Series Terminal
5 - 44
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.10
Issue 5.0
Wall Mounting the Multiline Terminal
You can wall mount a DT300/DT700 Series connection Multiline Terminal
using the base cover or an optional wall mount unit. A wall mount unit must be
used if adapters are installed on the Multiline Terminal.
4.10.1
Wall Mounting a Multiline Terminal using the Base Plate
4.10.1.1
Adjusting the Hanger Hook
1.
Remove the hook from the unit.
Hanger Hook
Figure 5-44
Removing the Hanger Hook on a
DT300/DT700 Series Terminal
2.
Turn the hook with the tab toward the top.
3.
Slide the hook until it glides into position forming the
hanger hook for the handset.
Figure 5-45 Sliding the Hanger Hook into Position
System Hardware Manual
5 - 45
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.10.1.2
Wall Mounting the Multiline Terminal
1.
Plug line cord in the wall receptacle. Leave about
eight inches of cord and bundle the rest as shown in
Figure 5-46 Bundling the Line Cord.
Figure 5-46 Bundling the Line Cord
2.
Ensure the Tilt Legs are in the flat (unused position).
3.
Plug the line cord into the Multiline Terminal as
illustrated in Figure 5-47 Plugging in Line Cord.
Line In
Figure 5-47 Plugging in Line Cord
4.
5 - 46
Align the two holes on the back of the multiline
terminal with the two screws on the wall plate and
slide downward (refer to Figure 5-48 Mount Multiline
Terminal Wall on Wall Plate on page 5-47).
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 5-48 Mount Multiline Terminal Wall on Wall Plate
5.
4.10.1.3
Push spare line cord behind the Multiline Terminal.
Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Wall Mounted
Base Plate.
To remove the Multiline Terminal, push up on the
telephone until it comes loose.
Figure 5-49 Removing the Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
5 - 47
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.10.1.4
Wall Mounting the Base on a Switch Box
1.
Locate the screw holes on the base and hang the
cover over the screws on the switch box as
illustrated in Figure 5-50 Wall Mounting Base on
Switch Box.
Figure 5-50 Wall Mounting Base on Switch Box
2.
Hang the Multiline Terminal on the base.
Figure 5-51 Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal
.
5 - 48
Because of strength variation in switch boxes, this
method is not recommended.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 5
Issue 5.0
MULTILINE TERMINALS OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
5.1
DT300/DT700 Series Terminal Options
The following chart provides a quick overview of the options available with the
DT300/DT700 Series telephones.
Table 5-12 Connectivity of Options
IP Terminals
Sophisticated
ITL-320C-1
Value
ITL-8LD-1
ITL-12D-1
ITL-24D-1
ITL-32D-1
Economy
ITL-2E-1
ITL-6DE-1
ITL-8LDE-1
Value
DTL-8LD-1
DTL-12D-1
DTL-24D-1
DTL-32D-1
Economy
DTL-2E-1
DTL-6DE-1
3
3
3
3
3
12LK Kit
N/A (Built in)
3
N/A
3
N/A
8LK Unit
3
3
N/A
3
N/A
Terminal Options
Ten Key Kit
Key Kit
Digital Terminals
(Except
8LD-1 Unit)
Common
Digital
(Except
8LD-1 Unit)
ADA:
Analog Recording Adapter
3
3
N/A
3
N/A
PSA:
PSTN Adapter for analog
3
3
N/A
3
N/A
DSS:
60-Button DSS Console
3
3
N/A
Connect to Digital Port on
KTS
APR:
Analog Port adapter with
Ringer
3
N/A
DESI-less LK/LCD Unit
3
N/A
(Except
8LD-1 Unit)
3
Backlit LCD
N/A
(Except
8LD-1 Unit)
IP
DESI-less LK/LCD Unit
Headset
Built In Headset Port
System Hardware Manual
N/A (Built in)
3
3
3
N/A
N/A
3
5 - 49
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.2
DT300/DT700 Series Optional Terminal Equipment
5.2.1
8LK-L (BK) UNIT/8LK-L (WH) UNIT
Provides eight additional line keys to ITL or DTL terminals (except
Economy). The unit features:
Š
Mounts directly to right side of terminal
Š
Supports Red and Green LED colors
Figure 5-52 8LK-L UNIT
5.2.1.1
Installing the 8LK-L UNIT
To prevent possible damage to the 8LK-L
UNIT or the DTL/ITL multiline terminal
during installation or removal,
disconnect the line cord/LAN cable and
the AC/DC adapter from the DTL/ITL
multiline terminal.
1.
Remove both plastic panels from the front of the
multiline terminal.
2.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
.
5 - 50
Only one 8LK-L UNIT can be attached to the DTL/ITL
multiline terminal.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
3.
Pry the side panel from the multiline terminal.
Side Panel
Figure 5-53 Remove Side Panel from Multiline Terminal
4.
Return the multiline terminal to the buttons side up
position.
5.
Fit the projections on the side of the 8LK-L UNIT
into the guide holes on the side of the multiline
terminal.
6.
Secure the 8LK-L UNIT with the two screws
provided.
Figure 5-54 Securing the 8LK-L UNIT with Screws
7.
System Hardware Manual
Turn the multiline terminal upside down.
5 - 51
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
8.
Open the small door covering the side option
connectors by pulling the cover handle to the front.
Telephone
Connection Cable
Side Option
Connector
Cover
Figure 5-55 Install the 8LK-L UNIT Cable
5.2.2
9.
Connect the cable from the 8LK-L UNIT to the side
option connector (see Figure 5-55 Install the 8LK-L
UNIT Cable) on the multiline terminal and close the
cover.
10.
Attach the side panel to the side of the 8LK-L UNIT.
11.
Return the multiline terminal to the buttons side up
position.
12.
Complete the installation by reattaching both plastic
panels to the front of the multiline terminal.
8LKD (LD)-L (BK) UNIT/8LKD (LD)-L (WH) UNIT
Provides eight additional line keys to DT300 Series (DTL) terminals.
The unit features:
5 - 52
Š
Mounts directly to top side of terminal
Š
Supports Desi-less 2 LCD panels
Š
Eight line keys by four pages
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 5-56 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT
5.2.2.1
Installing the 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT
To prevent possible damage to the 8LKD
(LD)-L UNIT or the DTL multiline
terminal during installation or removal,
disconnect the line cord/LAN cable and
the AC/DC adapter from the DTL
multiline terminal.
1.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
.
2.
Only one 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT can be attached to the
DTL multiline terminal.
Pry the side panel from the multiline terminal.
Screw
Side Panel
Figure 5-57 Remove Side Panel from Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
5 - 53
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Remove the screw (refer to Figure 5-57 Remove
Side Panel from Multiline Terminal on page 5-53).
4.
Carefully, return the multiline terminal to the buttons
side up position.
5.
Remove the soft keys and line key kit from the
telephone.
6.
Gently lift the small black bar on the ribbon cable
connector (refer to Figure 5-58 Ribbon Cable
Connector).
Lift
Here
Figure 5-58 Ribbon Cable Connector
5 - 54
7.
Plug ribbon cable on back of 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT into
connector until pressure is felt.
8.
Press down on the black bar to lock the cable into
place (refer to Figure 5-59 Ribbon Cable Installed
on page 5-55).
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Guide
Guide
Projection
(One Each Side)
Figure 5-59 Ribbon Cable Installed
9.
Align the projections on the bottom of the 8LKD
(LD)-L UNIT into the guide holes on top of the
multiline terminal.
10.
Slide the 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT toward the keypad
buttons until snug (refer to Figure 5-60 8LKD (LD)-L
UNIT Installed).
Figure 5-60 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT Installed
System Hardware Manual
5 - 55
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
11.
Holding the LCD in place, turn the multiline terminal
button side down.
12.
Install the screw (refer to Figure 5-61 Install Screw).
Screw
Side Panel
Figure 5-61 Install Screw
5.2.3
13.
Attach the side panel to the side of the 8LKD (LD)-L
UNIT (refer to Figure 5-67 Install Screw on page
5-60).
14.
Return the multiline terminal to the buttons side up
position.
15.
Connect the line cord/LAN cable and the AC/DC
adapter to the DTL multiline terminal.
8LKI (LD)-L (BK) UNIT/8LKI (LD)-L (WH) UNIT
Provides eight additional line keys to DT700 Series (ITL) DESI-less
terminals. The unit features:
5 - 56
Š
Mounts directly to top side of terminal
Š
Supports Desi-less 2 LCD panels
Š
Eight line keys by four pages
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 5-62 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT
5.2.3.1
Installing the 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT
To prevent possible damage to the 8LKI
(LD)-L UNIT or the ITL multiline
terminal during installation or removal,
disconnect the line cord/LAN cable and
the AC/DC adapter from the ITL
multiline terminal.
1.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
.
2.
Only one 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT can be attached to the ITL
multiline terminal.
Pry the side panel from the multiline terminal.
Screw
Side Panel
Figure 5-63 Remove Side Panel from Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
5 - 57
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Remove the screw (refer to Figure 5-63 Remove
Side Panel from Multiline Terminal on page 5-57).
4.
Carefully, return the multiline terminal to the buttons
side up position.
5.
Remove the soft keys and line key kit from the
telephone.
6.
Gently lift the small black bar to open the ribbon
cable connector.
Lift
Here
Figure 5-64 Ribbon Cable Connector
5 - 58
7.
Plug ribbon cable on back of 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT into
connector (metal side down) until pressure is felt.
8.
Press down on the black bar to lock the cable into
place (refer to Figure 5-65 Ribbon Cable Installed
on page 5-59).
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Guide
Guide
Projection
(One Each Side)
Figure 5-65 Ribbon Cable Installed
9.
Align the projections on the bottom of the 8LKI
(LD)-L UNIT into the guide holes on top of the
multiline terminal (refer to Figure 5-65 Ribbon Cable
Installed).
10.
Slide the 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT toward the keypad
buttons until snug (refer to Figure 5-66 8LKI (LD)-L
UNIT Installed).
Figure 5-66 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT Installed
System Hardware Manual
5 - 59
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
11.
Holding the LCD in place, turn the multiline terminal
button side down.
12.
Install screw (refer to Figure 5-67 Install Screw).
Screw
Side Panel
Figure 5-67 Install Screw
5.2.4
13.
Attach the side panel to the side of the 8LKI (LD)-L
UNIT (refer to Figure 5-67 Install Screw).
14.
Return the multiline terminal to the buttons side up
position.
15.
Connect the line cord/LAN cable and the AC/DC
adapter to the ITL multiline terminal.
DCL-60-1 (BK) CONSOLE/DCL-60-1 (WH) CONSOLE
The Attendant Console has 60 programmable line keys and is
available in black or white. The unit features:
Š
60 programmable Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys (refer to
system user guides).
Š
Supported on ITL or DTL modular terminals
Š
Green and Red LEDs
The DSS Console gives a keyset user a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and
one-button access to extensions, trunks and system features.
The 60-Button DSS Console provides an additional page for
additional programmable keys. This is provided by a page switching
key that allows “shifting” between the first and second set of keys. If
this key is used the amount of keys per page is reduced to 59 as one
is used for the addition of this key.
5 - 60
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Keep the following in mind when installing DSS Consoles:
Š
A 60-Button DSS Console requires a separate digital station port
when pairing with a digital keyset. For IP terminals, the first console is
connected to the side option slot using a special cable.
Š
Only 1 console can be physically attached to an IP terminal, the
remaining 3 must be hard wired from a TDM port.
Š
When fitted to an IP terminal the DSS console requires it’s own power
supply. PoE is not supported for the DSS console.
Š
Up to 32 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up
Š
A single extension can have up to four 60-button DSS Consoles (32
is the maximum allowed per system).
Š
Each DSS console fitted to a TDM port will require a TDM port
license.
Figure 5-68 DCL-60-1 CONSOLE
5.2.4.1
Installing the DCL-60-1 CONSOLE
To prevent possible damage to the DCL60-1 CONSOLE or the DTL/ITL
multiline terminal during installation or
removal, disconnect the line cord/LAN
cable and the AC/DC adapter from the
DTL/ITL multiline terminal.
1.
Remove both plastic panels from the front of the
multiline terminal.
2.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
.
System Hardware Manual
Only one DCL-60-1 CONSOLE can be attached to the
DTL/ITL multiline terminal at a time.
5 - 61
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Pry the side panel from the multiline terminal.
Side Panel
Figure 5-69 Remove Side Panel from Multiline Terminal
4.
Turn the multiline terminal button side up.
5.
Fit the projections of the supplied bracket into the
side of the multiline terminal.
6.
Attach the bracket with three supplied screws.
Screws
Figure 5-70 Secure Bracket to Multiline Terminal with Screws
5 - 62
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
7.
Carefully push the Serial cable into the Serial Cable
Groove (ITL, DT700 only).
Figure 5-71 Press Serial Cable into Groove
8.
Using the guides, slide the DCL-60-1 onto the
installed bracket (refer to Figure 5-71 Press Serial
Cable into Groove).
9.
Secure the DCL-60-1 CONSOLE to the bracket with
the two screws provided.
Figure 5-72
System Hardware Manual
Securing the DCL-60-1 CONSOLE
with Screws
5 - 63
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
10.
Open the small door covering the side option
connectors by pulling the cover latch toward you
(refer to Figure 5-73 Serial Cable Installed, ITL,
DT700 only).
11.
Connect the cable from the DCL-60-1 CONSOLE to
the Side Option Connector on the multiline terminal
and close the cover (ITL, DT700 only).
Figure 5-73 Serial Cable Installed
5 - 64
12.
Set the height of the tilt leg on the multiline terminal
to the desired height.
13.
Set the height of the tilt leg on the DCL-60-1
CONSOLE to match the tilt leg on the multiline
terminal.
14.
Attach the side panel to the side of the DCL-60-1
CONSOLE.
15.
Return the multiline terminal and DCL-60-1
CONSOLE to the buttons side up position.
16.
Connect the digital cable to the LINE jack (DT300
Series).
17.
Connect the AC Adapter cable (DT300/DT700
Series) See Figure 5-74 Connect AC Adapter Cable
on page 5-65.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 5-74 Connect AC Adapter Cable
18.
Complete the installation by reattaching both plastic
panels to the front of the multiline terminal.
Figure 5-75 DCL-60-1 CONSOLE Installed
5.2.5
LCD (BL)-L (BK) UNIT/LCD (BL)-L (WH) UNIT
The LCD (BL)-L UNIT is an optional LCD unit for modular terminals
and supports the backlit LCD feature (DT300 Series only).
System Hardware Manual
5 - 65
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-76 LCD (BL)-L UNIT
5.2.6
PANEL( )-L UNIT
Optional plastic color side panels that allow users to customize the
ITL/DTL terminals. The following colors are available for the Base
(all), VLCD (Value LCD) and SLCD (Sophi LCD) terminals:
Š
Silver (original)
Š
Red
Š
Blue
Š
Clear
Š
Wood Grain
Š
Environmental
.
Right and Left side panels are not interchangeable.
Figure 5-77 PANEL( )-L UNIT
5.2.7
WM-L UNIT Attached to Wall
The WM-L UNIT (Wall Mount Unit) is used to attach any DT300/
DT700 Series multiline terminal to the wall. This unit connects to the
back side of the telephone.
When optional adapters are used, the multiline terminal must be
installed on the wall using the WM-L UNIT.
5 - 66
1.
Plug line cord in the wall receptacle. Leave about eight inches
of cord and bundle the rest.
2.
Feed the line cord through the opening in the WM-L UNIT.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
3.
Attach the WM-L UNIT to the wall using four screws (refer to
Figure 5-78 Attach the WM-L UNIT to Wall).
Screws
Screws
Figure 5-78 Attach the WM-L UNIT to Wall
4.
Align the four cutouts with the four tabs on the WM-L UNIT
(refer to Figure 5-79 Cutouts for WM-L UNIT).
Cutouts
Cutouts
Figure 5-79 Cutouts for WM-L UNIT
System Hardware Manual
5 - 67
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.
Push down on telephone until the WM-L UNIT snaps into place
(refer to Figure 5-80 WM-L UNIT Installed).
Figure 5-80 WM-L UNIT Installed
5.2.8
Release the WM-L UNIT
1.
To release the telephone from the WM-L UNIT, press the
release button and push the telephone up (refer to Figure 5-81
WM-L UNIT Release Button).
Release Button
Figure 5-81 WM-L UNIT Release Button
5 - 68
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
5.2.9
WM-L UNIT Attached to Wall Plate
The WM-L UNIT (Wall Mount Unit) is used to attach any DT300/
DT700 Series multiline terminal to the wall plate This unit connects
to the back side of the telephone.
When optional adapters are used, the multiline terminal must be
installed on the wall plate using the WM-L UNIT.
1.
Plug line cord in the wall plate receptacle. Leave about eight
inches of cord and bundle the rest.
2.
Feed the line cord through the opening in the WM-L UNIT.
3.
Plug the line cord into the Multiline Terminal as illustrated in
Figure 5-82 Plugging in Line Cord.
Line In
Figure 5-82 Plugging in Line Cord
4.
System Hardware Manual
Align the four cutouts with the four tabs on the WM-L UNIT
(refer to Figure 5-83 Cutouts for WM-L UNIT on page 5-70).
5 - 69
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Cutouts
Cutouts
Figure 5-83 Cutouts for WM-L UNIT
5.
Push up on the WM-L UNIT until it snaps into place (refer to
Figure 5-84 WM-L UNIT Installed).
Figure 5-84 WM-L UNIT Installed
5 - 70
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
6.
Align the two holes on the back of the WM-L UNIT
with the two screws on the wall plate and slide
downward (refer to Figure 5-85 Mount Multiline
Terminal Wall on Wall Plate).
Figure 5-85 Mount Multiline Terminal Wall on Wall Plate
.
7.
5.2.10
Because of strength variation in switch boxes, this
method is not recommended.
Push excess line cord behind the Multiline Terminal.
Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Wall Mounted Plate.
To remove the Multiline Terminal, push up on the telephone until it
comes loose.
Figure 5-86 Removing the Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
5 - 71
Issue 5.0
SECTION 6
UNIVERGE SV8100
OPTIONAL HANDSETS
6.1
ITL / DTL PTM Handset
The Push to Mute (PTM) handset has a single-pole, single throw switch that
must be continuously held down to provide local mute.
These replacement handsets for ITL/DTL terminals help to ensure a secure
telephony environment by keeping unwanted audio from being transmitted
over the corporate telephone network.
Using the PTM handset on an NEC digital or IP terminal prevents
eavesdropping and eliminates the worry that privileged information could be
transmitted without user authority. These handsets are also an ideal solution
to filter unwanted audio transmissions from environments with ambient
background noise.
Figure 5-87 ITL / DTL PTM Handset
6.2
ITL / DTL PTT Handset
The Push to Talk (PTT) handset has a single-pole, single throw switch that
must be continuously held down to transmit local audio.
These replacement handsets for ITL/DTL terminals help to ensure a secure
telephony environment by keeping unwanted audio from being transmitted
over the corporate telephone network.
Using the PTT handset on an NEC digital or IP terminal prevents
eavesdropping and eliminates the worry that privileged information could be
transmitted without user authority. These handsets are also an ideal solution
to filter unwanted audio transmissions from environments with ambient
background noise.
Figure 5-88 ITL / DTL PTT Handset
5 - 72
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.3
Issue 5.0
UTR-1-1 USB Handset
The NEC USB telephone can be plugged directly into a PC USB port, enabling
the high quality voice input and output capabilities of a standard desktop
telephone. By connecting it to the USB port of a computer, calls can
immediately be made and received using a SoftPhone without installation of
additional software drivers.
The physical design eliminates stress associated with holding the handset
between the ear and and shoulder. The user immediately hears a dial tone
upon taking the handset off-hook, eliminating the need to click on/off hook
icons in a PC application when making a call.
6.3.1
Handset Connection
Plug the handset cable (RJ-11 connector) into the bottom of the
cradle. Route the handset cable in the handset groove.
Figure 5-89 Installing the UTR-1-1 USB Handset Cable
6.3.2
USB Connection
Plug a USB cable (type A connector) into the back of the cradle. Plug
the USB cable (type B connector) into the USB port of a PC.
Figure 5-90 Installing the UTR-1-1 USB Handset to a PC
System Hardware Manual
5 - 73
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.3.3
Wall Mounting
The UTR-1-1 USB handset can be mounted on the wall using a wall
plate or two screws. Align the two holes on the back of the UTR-1-1
and slide down onto the wall plate or screws.
Figure 5-91 Wall Mounting the UTR-1-1 USB Handset
.
5 - 74
Because of strength variation in switch boxes, this method is not recommended.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 7
Issue 5.0
BLUETOOTH CORDLESS HANDSET
7.1
Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH) Interface
This optional interface allows the multiline terminal user to use Bluetooth
technology to provide a cordless handset. This handset provides:

Keyset-like Handset

Eight Line Buttons

Function Button

Dial Button

Display

All Multiline Terminal Functions with Main Unit

Cradle Charges Handset

Base Side RF Block (50 meters, Class 1)

Bluetooth Distance: 50 Meters
Up to 16 devices can be installed within a 100m (open area, ex: outdoors) or
50m (confined/blocked area, ex: indoors) radius and each device is located
with 1 meter between each device simultaneously. This maximum can be
affected by the installation environment.
The BCH and a Bluetooth headset (BTH) cannot be used at the same time.
When using a Bluetooth headset in place of the handset, the Plantronics
Voyager 510 headset is recommended.
When charging the BCH, the following LEDs provide indications of the status:
Table 5-13 BCH Charging LEDs
On-Hook Charging:
Red = Charging
Green = Charging Complete
Off-Hook (Idle):
No LED = Idle
Flashing Red = Incoming Call
The BCH will retain call histories for up to 10 outgoing and 10 incoming calls.
For outgoing calls, this would include completed and uncompleted calls. For
incoming calls, this would include both answered and unanswered calls. The
call history provides the date, time and telephone number for each call. When
the limit is exceeded, the oldest call is deleted and replaced with the newest
call.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 75
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
7.2
Selecting a Location
Before choosing a location for your new telephone, consider these important
guidelines:
5 - 76

If multiple cordless terminals are installed, keep their Bluetooth cradles at
least 3.3 feet (1meter) apart from one another.

If the Bluetooth cradle is installed near a metal, concrete wall or any other
structure that could affect radio transmission, a communication failure might
occur.

Keep the Bluetooth cradle at least 9.8 feet (3 meters) apart from any of the
devices listed below. Be also careful not to get within 9.8 feet (3 meters) of
these devices when using the Bluetooth handset.

Microwave ovens

Wireless LAN access points (AP)

Medical apparatus

RFID (apparatus operating in the 2.4 GHz band)

Manufacturing equipment, such as plasma strippers (LSI manufacturing)

Electronic toll gates

Bluetooth devices
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
7.3
Issue 5.0
Controls and Indicators
Controls and indicators can be found in Figure 5-92 Bluetooth Cradle Controls
and Indicators or Figure 5-93 Bluetooth Handset Controls and Indicators on
page 5-78.
Figure 5-92 Bluetooth Cradle Controls and Indicators
System Hardware Manual
5 - 77
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-93 Bluetooth Handset Controls and Indicators
5 - 78
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
7.4
Issue 5.0
Installing the Bluetooth Cordless Handset
The BCH-L (BK) UNIT is an optional device that transforms the standard
multifunctional telephone into a cordless terminal. This section explains how
to transform the standard hand-set into a BCH-L (BK) UNIT. The BCH-L (BK)
UNIT cannot be connected to the DTL-2E-1 or DTL-6DE-1 telephones.
7.4.1
Installing the Bluetooth Handset Cradle
Before installing or removing the BCH-L (BK)
UNIT, remove the line cord and the AC
adapter from the outlet.
1.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
2.
Unplug the line cord and handset cord from the multiline
terminal.
.
3.
Only one BCH-L (BK) UNIT can be attached to the DTL multiline
terminal.
Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 5-94
Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support).
Stoppers
Tilt Leg
Figure 5-94 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support
System Hardware Manual
4.
Push the two stopper tabs through the slots to separate the tilt
leg from the leg support.
5.
Lay the tilt leg and the leg support flat.
6.
Press the two tabs locking the legs to the multiline terminal and
pull the legs toward you, lifting to remove (refer to Figure 5-95
Remove Legs From Multiline Terminal on page 5-80).
5 - 79
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-95 Remove Legs From Multiline Terminal
7.
Remove the side panel.
8.
Disconnect serial connection cord from terminal body. Leave
cord connected to the cradle unit.
9.
Push the latch to the right to unlock the cradle unit. Then push
the cradle unit forward to separate it from the terminal body
(see Figure 5-96 Detach Cradle from Multiline Terminal).
Figure 5-96 Detach Cradle from Multiline Terminal
5 - 80
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
10.
Insert the cradle connecting cable of the Bluetooth Cradle
(BTC) into the unit connector.
Figure 5-97 Attach Bluetooth Cradle to the Multiline Terminal
11.
Fit the projections on the side of the Bluetooth Cradle into the
guide holes on the side of the terminal and pull toward you
(Figure 5-97 Attach Bluetooth Cradle to the Multiline Terminal)
until the unit snaps into place.
12.
Attach the side panel to the Bluetooth Cradle.
13.
Press the connecting cable into the grooved cutout.
Figure 5-98 Grooved Cutout for Connecting Cable
System Hardware Manual
5 - 81
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
14.
Remove the connector cover (rubber) from the bottom of the
multiline terminal.
Figure 5-99 Removing the Connector Cover
15.
Insert the lower claws of the Bottom Unit (see Figure 5-100
Installing the Bottom Unit) into precut holes on the multiline
terminal.
Figure 5-100 Installing the Bottom Unit
16.
5 - 82
Align connector on inside of bottom unit and push down until
unit snaps into place.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
17.
Push the latch to release the cover (see Figure 5-101 Stowing
the Bottom Unit Cable). Stow the extra bottom unit connecting
cable and close the cover.
Figure 5-101 Stowing the Bottom Unit Cable
18.
Cut or trim the supplied coupled device for the tilt legs handset
option.
19.
Insert the stopper coupled device into the right and left tilt legs
(see Figure 5-102 Insert Stopper for Handset Use).
Figure 5-102 Insert Stopper for Handset Use
20.
System Hardware Manual
Set the coupled device for tilt legs into position.
5 - 83
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
21.
Reinstall the legs, pushing upwards until both locks snap into
place.
22.
Set tilt legs to desired position.
23.
Return the multiline terminal to the numbered keypad in the up
position.
24.
Connect the Line cord and the AC adapter.
25.
Place the Bluetooth handset in the cradle.
.
26.
Before you use the handset for the first time or reuse the handset after
it has been left out of service for a long time, charge it for at least five
hours. A full charge takes approximately 16 hours.
Erect the antenna (refer to Figure 5-103 Bluetooth Handset
Installed).
Figure 5-103 Bluetooth Handset Installed
5 - 84
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
7.4.2
Wall Mounting the Bluetooth Cradle
To prevent possible damage to the BCH-L (BK)
UNIT due to falling, NEC recommends installing
the unit in a firm position so it will not fall due to its
own weight.
Clearances required for installing the Bluetooth cradle are shown
below. Avoid mounting the cradle on a plaster-board wall, but before
mounting the cradle on a wall, check that the wall can withstand the
weight of the telephone and the load from pulling the telephone
during operation.
Figure 5-104 Wall Mount Spacing Guide BCH-L (BK) UNIT
1.
Attach two wood screws to the wall.
.
System Hardware Manual
Keep a clearance of about 0.08” (2mm) between each wood screw
and the wall (refer to Figure 5-105 Installing Wood Screws on page
5-86).
5 - 85
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-105 Installing Wood Screws
2.
Remove the Bluetooth hanger from the cradle.
.
3.
With a screwdriver, pry from the bottom, and lift the handset hanger
from the cradle.
Rotate the hanger top to bottom. Slide it downward in the
hollow until it clicks into position.
Figure 5-106 Change Handset Hanger
5 - 86
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
5.
Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 5-94
Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support).
Stoppers
Tilt Leg
Figure 5-107 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support
6.
Hook the wall mount holes (C and D) on the back of the
terminal on wood screws (c and d) installed.
Figure 5-108 Wall Mounting the Terminal
System Hardware Manual
5 - 87
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
7.4.3
Remove and Replace Handset Battery
The battery loaded in the Bluetooth handset has a useful life of about
two years, depending on how the handset is used. If the battery
voltage diminishes quickly after the battery has been charged for a
long time, replace with a new Li-ion battery.
1.
Remove cover from back of handset.
Figure 5-109 Removing Battery Cover from Handset
2.
Remove existing battery and dispose of properly.
Figure 5-110 Removing Battery from Handset
3.
Install new Li-ion battery.
.
4.
5 - 88
Full charge takes approximately 16 hours.
Reinstall battery cover.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 8
Issue 5.0
BLUETOOTH HUB ADAPTER
8.1
Bluetooth Hub Adapter (BHA) Features
The BHA-L UNIT adapter connects a Bluetooth device to a multiline terminal.
The BHA-L UNIT cannot be connected to the DTL-2E-1 or DTL-6DE-1
telephone.
8.1.1
Installing the BHA-L UNIT
Before installing or removing the BHA-L UNIT,
remove the line cord and the AC adapter from the
outlet.
1.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
2.
Unplug the line cord and handset cord from the multiline
terminal.
.
3.
Only one BHA-L UNIT can be attached to the DTL multiline terminal.
Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 5-111
Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support).
Stoppers
Tilt Leg
Figure 5-111 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support
4.
System Hardware Manual
Remove the connector cover (rubber) from the bottom of the
multiline terminal (see Figure 5-112 Removing the Connector
Cover on page 5-90).
5 - 89
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 5-112 Removing the Connector Cover
5.
Insert the lower claws of the Bottom Unit (see Figure 5-113
Installing the BHA-L UNIT) into precut holes on the multiline
terminal.
Figure 5-113 Installing the BHA-L UNIT
5 - 90
6.
Align connector on inside of BHA-L UNIT and push down until
unit snaps into place.
7.
Set tilt legs to desired position.
8.
Return the multiline terminal to the numbered keypad in the up
position.
9.
Connect the Line cord and the AC adapter.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
8.1.2
Pairing a Bluetooth Device and Multiline Terminal (Bluetooth
Installed)
Access the Bluetooth screen from a multiline terminal menu and
register the Bluetooth headset with the BHA-L UNIT.
8.1.2.1
Accessing the Bluetooth Device Setup Screen
From the multiline terminal, access the setup screen
using one of the following:
8.1.2.2

If the BHA-L UNIT is connected to an Aspire X:
Press menu keys > [5. Optional Devices] > [1. Bluetooth].

If the BHA-L UNIT is connected to a PBX (other than Aspire
X):
Press menu keys > [3. Setup] > [5. Optional Devices] >
[1. Bluetooth].
Entering a PIN Code
In pairing a Bluetooth device having a PIN Code other
than 0000, enter a string of four to 16 digits to suit that
device.
Figure 5-114 Entering a PIN Code
8.1.2.3
Pairing
Up to eight Bluetooth devices can be located around the
BHA-L UNIT, select which can be paired with the device
(refer to Figure 5-115 Pairing a Device on page 5-91).
Figure 5-115 Pairing a Device
System Hardware Manual
5 - 91
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
8.1.2.4
Connecting the Paired Device
Enable the Bluetooth device. Select [2. Enable] in the
connection screen.
After pairing a Bluetooth device, be sure to
configure its connection to enable it. If
settings are not completed, the Bluetooth
device that does the pairing cannot be used.
Figure 5-116 Connecting the Paired Device
8.1.2.5
Unpairing
To unpair a paired the Bluetooth device, select the device
in the [Delete] screen.
Figure 5-117 Unpairing a Device
8.1.2.6
Visibility Setting
Set whether to make information about the BHA-L UNIT
visible to other Bluetooth devices (default: [1. Disable]).
Figure 5-118 Setting Visibility Option
5 - 92
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
8.1.2.7
BT Information
You can view the following kinds of information about the
BHA-L UNIT:
.

Firmware and hardware versions.

Bluetooth module information and standard.

Installed profile versions.
Device address and name.
Figure 5-119 Setting Bluetooth Information
System Hardware Manual
5 - 93
Issue 5.0
SECTION 9
UNIVERGE SV8100
SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE
9.1
Installing the SLT Adapter
The Single Line Telephone adapter provides an interface for Single Line
Telephones and other similar devices from an ESI channel.
This adapter can be connected to any ESI port.
1.
Connect one end of the RJ-11 to the ESI port on the chassis and one
end to the ESI jack on the SLT Adapter.
2.
Connect one end of a second RJ-11 to the TEL jack on the SLT Adapter
and the other end to the Single Line Telephone.
SLTII(1)-U( ) ADP
TE L
ESI
RJ-11
RJ-11
2-wire
2-wire
ESI
Figure 5-120 Installing SLT Adapter
5 - 94
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Modular Terminal
GN
SLTII(1)-U( ) ADP
Y
3
T
R
CD-8DLCA or
CD-16DLCA
To ESIU
4
RD
BL
Base
Cord
ESI Port
Modular Terminal Connections
ESIU Port
ESIU
Single Line Telephone Connections
Figure 5-121 Connecting the SLT Adapter
9.2
Wall-Mounting the SLT Adapter
1.
Unplug the two line cords from the SLT Adapter.
2.
Remove the two screws from the front of the SLT Adapter.
3.
Lift the cover off the adapter.
Figure 5-122 Removing the Cover
System Hardware Manual
5 - 95
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Using the two screws provided with the SLT Adapter, attach the back
cover to the desired location.
Figure 5-123 Attaching the Unit
5 - 96
5.
Replace the front cover and the two screws removed in Step 2.
6.
Plug the two modular line cords back into the SLT Adapter which were
removed in Step 1.
Installing DT300/DT700 Series (DTL/ITL) Digital and IP Multiline Terminals
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter provides information for installing optional equipment, such as
PGD(2)-U10 ADPs, background music, door boxes, DSS consoles, Dterm
VSR, external paging as well as other handsets, recording devices and
adapters on the SV8100 digital and IP telephones.
SECTION 2
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
2.1
Chapter
6
Using a PGD(2)-U10 ADP
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP provides two circuits which allow connection
to external terminals such as:
Š
Door Box (eight maximum per system)
Š
External Speaker (eight maximum with PGD(2)-U10 ADPs [with
amplifier], one on the CD-CP00 [no amplifier])
Š
External Music Source (external MOH) (96 maximum per
system)
Š
External Recording System (96 maximum per system)
Š
External Ringing
The system allows a maximum of 56 PGD(2)-U10 ADPs to be
installed (48 for ACI ports [external MOH or external recording
system], four for Door Boxes, and four for Paging). The
PGD(2)-U10 ADPs also provides multi-purpose controls. These
control relays can be used for controlling the external amplifier,
external music source and door lock control with the use of a Door
Box. The system allows for up eight general purpose relays with the
PGD(2)-U10 ADPs (four relays on each PGD(2)-U10 ADP).
System Hardware Manual
6-1
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP connects to any available digital extension port. The
terminal connections made within the PGD(2)-U10 ADP and the jumper
settings determine what features are used for each circuit.
Channel 2
Status LED
Channel 1
Status LED
Figure 6-1 PGD(2)-U10 ADP
2.2
LED Indications
Table 6-1 PGD(2)-U10 ADP LED Indications
LED
2.3
6-2
Indication
Note
LED 1
Green LED when
CH1 in use.
Flashing green LED indicates dipswitch setting
and programming for CH1 is conflicting.
LED 2
Green LED when
CH2 in use.
Flashing green LED indicates dipswitch setting
and programming for CH2 is conflicting.
Setting up PGD(2)-U10 ADP Connections
Š
If the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is to be wall mounted, all the cable connections
should be made first.
Š
For the module to ID correctly after setting the jumpers, set the circuit type
to 0 for the module port in Program 10-03-01 prior to connecting the line
cord to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
1.
Remove the screw from the front of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
Figure 6-2 Remove Cover from PGD(2)-U10 ADP
2.
Using a screwdriver, break out the plastic piece covering the cable hole.
Figure 6-3 Remove Plastic Cover from Cable Hole
3.
System Hardware Manual
Set the S3 – S6 jumpers to the proper settings for the function to be used
(refer to Table 6-2 PGD(2)-U10 ADP S3 – S6 Jumper Settings on page
6-4).
6-3
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 6-2 PGD(2)-U10 ADP S3 – S6 Jumper Settings
S3
S4
Function
Open
Open
Door Box
On when in use.
Channel 1 Open
Short
External Paging Speaker
On when in use.
Short
Open
External Ringer
On when in use.
Short
Short
External Music on Hold /
Recording System
On steady.
S5
S6
Open
Open
Door Box
On when in use.
Channel 2 Open
Short
External Paging Speaker
On when in use.
Short
Open
External Ringer
On when in use.
Short
Short
External Music on Hold /
Recording System
On steady.
Function
LED Indication
LED Indication
Figure 6-4 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Jumper Settings
6-4
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
4.
Strip one end of the cable to be connected to the control relay or door
box so that approximately 1/4” (8 mm) of bare wire is exposed.
5.
Insert the cable into the proper CN4 or CN5 location while holding down
the lock button (holding down this lock button is easiest with a flat-head
screwdriver). Once the cable is in place, release the lock button.
.
System Hardware Manual
Refer to the specific function being connected for more detail on PGD(2)-U10
ADP connections.
6-5
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 6-5 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Connection Diagram
6-6
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Flat-head screwdriver
Cable
Press down
CN4, CN5
Figure 6-6 Connecting Cable to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP
6.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for any additional connections required.
7.
Replace the cover and tighten the screw to hold the cover in place.
8.
If required for the function being used, insert the RCA connectors into
the CN2 (Channel 1) and CN3 (Channel 2) connectors on the back of the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
System Hardware Manual
6-7
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 6-7 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Connections
9.
Install a modular jack for each PGD(2)-U10 ADP. For each module, run
one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the cross-connect block to a
modular jack. Ground the unused pair.
10.
Terminate the extension leads to GRN/RED of the modular jack.
Terminate the unused leads to the jack.
11.
Install bridging clips as required.
.
6-8
For the module to ID correctly, set the circuit type to 0 for the port in Program
10-03-01 prior to connecting the line cord.
12.
Plug a modular line cord from the mod jack to the CN1 connector on the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
13.
Optional:
To wall mount the PGD(2)-U10 ADP, insert two wood screws 100mm
apart (3 15/16”). Leave 3mm (1/8”) of the screw exposed. The screws
can be installed either vertical or horizontal, depending on which position
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
fits best for your location.
Figure 6-8 Installing the Screws
14.
The back of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP has two key-hole type openings.
Place the PGD(2)-U10 ADP over the two screws and slide it down or
over (depending on the positioning) to lock it in place.
Figure 6-9 Wall Mounting the PGD(2)-U10 ADP
System Hardware Manual
6-9
Issue 5.0
SECTION 3
UNIVERGE SV8100
BACKGROUND MUSIC
3.1
Installing Background Music
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music
source to speakers in keysets. If an extension user activates it, BGM plays
whenever the user’s extension is idle.
1.
Connecting to the CD-CP00:
Connect an RCA line from the CN8 or CN9 connector on the CD-CP00
to the appropriate location on the extension cross-connect block.
2.
Connect the two-conductor station cable from the cross-connect block to
the external music source.
3.
Install bridging clips as required.
Figure 6-10 CPRU Connections
6 - 10
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 4
Issue 5.0
DOOR BOX
4.1
Installing a Door Box
A PGD(2)-U10 ADP is required for this option.
The Door Box is a self-contained, water-resistant, Intercom unit typically used
to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the door can press the Door Box call
button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends chime tones to all
extensions programmed to receive chimes. The system can have up to eight
Door Boxes.
Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP audio output can optionally support two analog Door
Boxes. In addition, you can connect each circuit control relay to an electric
door strike. This allows an extension user to remotely activate the door strike
while talking to a visitor at the Door Box. The control relays are normally open.
When the relay on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is used, there is no need to assign
the relay to the Door Box – simply connect the relay as detailed in the steps
below for the Door Box used. The relays on the
PGD(2)-U10 ADPs are numbered 5-8.
.
The relay closes when the Door Box/external page zone is called. The maximum applied
voltage is 24vDC at 0.5A for each contact.
A PGD(2)-U10 ADP circuit used for an analog Door
Box cannot also be used for External Paging.
1.
Make sure the jumper in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP for the associated Door
Box is set correctly. (Refer to Figure 6-4 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Jumper
Settings on page 6-4).
2.
If a line cord was not previously connected to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP,
complete Steps 3-6. Otherwise, skip to Step 7.
3.
Install a modular jack for each PGD(2)-U10 ADP. For each module, run
one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the cross-connect block to a
modular jack. Ground the unused pair.
4.
Terminate the extension leads to GRN/RED of the modular jack.
Terminate the unused leads to the jack.
5.
Install bridging clips as required.
6.
Plug a modular line cord from the mod jack to the CN1 connector on the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
7.
If wall mounting the Door Box, remove the screw on the front of the Door
Box.
System Hardware Manual
6 - 11
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
8.
Remove the back half of the Door Box and attach this mounting bracket
to the wall with the two screws provided.
9.
Connect the two-conductor station cable from the CN4 connectors within
the PGD(2)-U10 ADP to the Door Box terminals. These wires must be
routed through the opening in the bottom of the Door Box mounting
bracket.
.
10.
Replace the front half of the Door Box and reattach the screw to secure it
in place.
11.
To connect a Door Box to an external relay for an unlock device, for
example, connect one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the Relay 5 (for
Door Box 1) or Relay 6 (for Door Box 2) connectors (CN5) in the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP. Connect the opposite end to the unlock device.
.
6 - 12
Be sure to maintain the proper polarity.
Refer to External Page and Door Box/Page Relays on page 6-18 for additional
information when using the CD-CP00 relay.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 6-11 Setting the PGD(2)-U10 ADP for a Door Box
System Hardware Manual
6 - 13
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 6-12 Installing a Door Box
6 - 14
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 5
Issue 5.0
EXTERNAL PAGING
5.1
External Page
Two external page zone/door box circuits are provided by each PGD(2)-U10
ADP installed. Each Door Box/external page circuit provides a dry relay
contact. The CD-CP00 also provides a connection for external paging and a
relay. The external page on the CD-CP00 is speaker number 9 - the relay is
number 0. The external page speakers provided by the PGD(2)-U10 ADPs are
1-8 – the relays on the PGD(2)-U10 ADPs are numbered 1~8.
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can be used for talkback with External Page, as can a
CO trunk port with the proper external page equipment (ex: Valcom) – set
Program 31-06-03 to “0” for talkback. However, the external page circuit on
the CD-CP00 cannot be used for talkback.
A PGD(2)-U10 ADP circuit used for External Paging
cannot also be used for an analog Door Box.
5.2
Installing an External Page System
1.
Connecting to the CD-CP00:
Connect an RCA line from the CN8 or CN9 connector on the CD-CP00
to the appropriate location on the extension cross-connect block.
2.
Connect the two-conductor station cable from the cross-connect block to
the external relay/external page.
3.
Install bridging clips as required.
OR
1.
Connecting to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP:
Make sure the jumper in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP for the channel is set
correctly. (Refer to Figure 6-4 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Jumper Settings on
page 6-4).
2.
If a line cord was not previously connected to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP,
complete Steps 3-6. Otherwise, skip to Step 7.
3.
Install a modular jack for each PGD(2)-U10 ADP. For each module, run
one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the cross-connect block to a
modular jack. Ground the unused pair.
System Hardware Manual
6 - 15
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Terminate the extension leads to GRN/RED of the modular jack.
Terminate the unused leads to the jack.
5.
Install bridging clips as required.
6.
Plug a modular line cord from the mod jack to the CN1 connector on the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
7.
Connect the two-conductor station cable from the CN5 connectors within
the PGD(2)-U10 ADP to the external relay/external page.
Figure 6-13 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Cable Connection
6 - 16
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP provides amplifiers for each
page output port (for a maximum of +8 dBM, 600
ohms at 1KHz). No additional page amplification is
provided by the PGD(2)-U10 ADP but, if required,
an external page amplifier can be used for additional
amplification.
The page output of the CD-CP00 does not provide
amplification (for a maximum output of -3 dBm, 600
ohms at 1KHz). If the paging volume is not
satisfactory using the CN8 or CN9 connector on the
CD-CP00, the PGD(2)-U10 ADP should be used
instead.
SECTION 6
EXTERNAL PAGING AND DOOR BOX/PAGE RELAYS
6.1
External Page Relays
Two external dry contact relays are available when a PGD(2)-U10 ADP is
installed which can be used to activate ancillary devices (i.e. door unlock
devices). The CD-CP00 also provides one relay. The CD-CP00 relay is
defined as a general purpose relay in programming (Program 10-21-01 = 3).
The CD-CP00 relay 0 is assigned to the door box extension port in
Program10-05-01. When the relay on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is used, there is
no need to assign the relay to the Door Box – simply connect the relay as
detailed in the steps below for the Door Box used. The relays on the PGD(2)U10 ADPs are numbered 5-8. Each Door Box/external page circuit provides a
dry relay contact.
Program Note: Program 10-21-01 sets the relay switch on the CD-CP00. If
set to 2 (External Speaker), service code 703+1 pages and the relay closes.
The relay reopens upon hang up. If set to 3 (General Purpose Relay), service
code 880+0 toggles the relay open or closed.
Š
System Hardware Manual
The service codes indicated are the default codes. Refer to Program
11-12-20 and 11-12-50 to redefine these codes as needed.
6 - 17
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.2
Door Box /External Page Relay Contacts
6.2.1
Connecting a Contact Relay Device to a Door Box/External Page
Relay
To connect a dry contact relay device to a Door Box/External Page
Relay:
To connect to the CD-CP00:
1.
Connect an RCA line from the CN8 or CN9 connector on the
CD-CP00 to the appropriate location on the extension crossconnect block.
2.
Connect the two-conductor station cable from the
cross-connect block to the external relay.
3.
Install bridging clips as required.
OR
6 - 18
1.
To connect to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP:
Make sure the jumper in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP for the channel
is set correctly. (Refer to Figure 6-4 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Jumper
Settings on page 6-4).
2.
If a line cord was not previously connected to the PGD(2)-U10
ADP, complete Steps 3-6. Otherwise, skip to Step 7.
3.
Install a modular jack for each PGD(2)-U10 ADP. For each
module, run one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the
cross-connect block to a modular jack. Ground the unused pair.
4.
Terminate the extension leads to GRN/RED of the modular
jack. Terminate the unused leads to the jack.
5.
Install bridging clips as required.
6.
Plug a modular line cord from the mod jack to the CN1
connector on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
7.
Connect the two-conductor station cable from the CN5
connectors in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP to the external relay.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
The relay closes when the Door Box/external
page zone is called. The maximum applied
voltage is 24vDC at .5A for each contact.
Figure 6-14 CD-CP00 Page Connections
SECTION 7
EXTERNAL RECORDING SYSTEM/EXTERNAL RINGER
7.1
External Recording System or External Ringer
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP allows the connection of an external recording system
or external ringer. With a customer-provided tape recorder, when an extension
user dials the ACI analog port extension number, they can automatically start
the recorder and activate the record function. When the user hangs up, the
recording stops and the tape recorder turns off. For tape recording, connect
the tape recorder AUX input jack to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP jack. Connect the
recorder control leads (if available) to the CTL (control relay) jack. By using
Department Calling, you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool.
When an extension user dials the Department Group pilot number, they reach
the first available tape recorder in the pool.
The relays in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP can optionally control customer-provided
external ringers (loud bells) and buzzers. When an extension user dials the
ACI analog port extension number, the associated PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay
closes and activates the ringer. You could use this capability to control an
emergency buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor, for example. In addition, if
programmed for ringing, an incoming trunk call can activate the ringer/buzzer.
System Hardware Manual
6 - 19
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
7.2
Installing an External Recording System or External Ringer
To connect to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP:
6 - 20
1.
Make sure the jumper in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP for the channel is set
correctly. (Refer to Figure 6-4 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Jumper Settings on
page 6-4).
2.
If a line cord was not previously connected to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP,
complete Steps 3-6. Otherwise, skip to Step 7.
3.
Install a modular jack for each PGD(2)-U10 ADP. For each module, run
one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the cross-connect block to a
modular jack. Ground the unused pair.
4.
Terminate the extension leads to GRN/RED of the modular jack.
Terminate the unused leads to the jack.
5.
Install bridging clips as required.
6.
Plug a modular line cord from the mod jack to the CN1 connector on the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
7.
Connect an RCA jack to the audio output(s) on the back of the .
8.
The opposite end of this cable is connected to the external recording
system or external ringer either directly or by connecting to the
cross-connect block where the item is connected. Refer to Figure 6-15
PGD(2)-U10 ADP Cable Connection on page 6-21.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 6-15 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Cable Connection
7.3
Programming
Š
10-03-01 : ETU Setup – Terminal Type (Circuit 1)
10-03-06 : ETU Setup – Terminal Type (Circuit 2)
Confirm that the PGD(2)-U10 ADP has defined the circuit type as either type
7 for External Ringer or 9 for ACIs. (If the PGD(2)-U10 ADP circuit had
previously been defined for another type of circuit, unplug the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP and plug it back in to reset the circuit type.)
Š
10-05-01 : General Purpose Relay Setup
Define which relay circuits (5-8) on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are used for
General Purpose Relays.
Š
11-06-01 : ACI Extension Numbering
Assign extension numbers to ACI software ports. Select a number outside
of the normal extension number range.
Aspire S: ACI Ports 1-8
Aspire: ACI Ports 1-96
System Hardware Manual
6 - 21
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
11-08-01 : ACI Group Pilot Number
Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups. When a user dials the pilot number,
they reach an available ACI software port within the group.
Aspire S: ACI Groups 1-4
Aspire: ACI Groups 1-16
Š
11-12-50 : Service Code Setup (For Service Access)
Specify the service code to be used for toggling the relay open and closed
(Default: 880).
Š
33-01-01 : ACI Port Type Setup
Set each ACI software port for input (1) or input/output (2). Use input ports
for Music on Hold sources. Use output ports for External Paging/ringer
control.
Aspire S: ACI Ports1-8
Aspire: ACI Ports 1-96
Š
33-02-01 : ACI Department Calling Group
Assign ACI software ports to ACI Department Groups. This lets ACI callers
connect to ACI software ports by dialing the group’s pilot number (set in
Program 11-08).
Aspire S: ACI Ports 1-8, ACI Groups 1-4
Aspire: ACI Ports 1-8, ACI Groups 1-16
ACI Recording
6 - 22
Š
10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits
Assign the number of conversation record circuits.
Š
14-09-01 : ACI Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks – ACI
Recording Destination Extension Number
Use this option to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per trunk
basis. The destination can be an ACI port’s extension number (assigned in
Program 11-06-01) or an ACI Department Group pilot number (assigned in
Program 11-08-01). If destinations are assigned in Programs 14-09 and 1512, the destination in Program 15-12 will be followed.
Š
14-09-02 : ACI Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks –
ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Call
Determine whether a trunk should be automatically recorded when an
incoming call is received (0=off, 1=on).
Š
14-09-04 : ACI Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks –
ACI Automatic Recording for Outgoing Call
Determine whether a trunk should be automatically recorded when an
outgoing call is
initiated (0=off, 1=on).
Š
15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys
If required, program an ACI Conversation Record Key (code 69 + 0). This
key allows an extension user to press the key to manually record a call to
the ACI.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Š
15-12-01 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions - ACI
Recording Destination Extension Number
Use this option to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per
extension basis. The destination can be an ACI port’s extension number
(assigned in Program 11-06) or an ACI Department Group pilot number
(assigned in Program 11-08). If destinations are assigned in Programs
14-09 and 15-12, the destination in Program 15-12 will be followed.
Š
15-12-02 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions - ACI
Automatic Recording for Incoming Call
Determine whether an extension should be automatically recorded when an
incoming call is received (0=off, 1=on).
Š
15-12-04 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions - ACI
Automatic Recording for Outgoing Call
Determine whether an extension should be automatically recorded when an
outgoing call is received (0=off, 1=on).
External Ringer
Š
System Hardware Manual
31-05-01 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Paging
For each trunk port which should ring the external ringer, enter “1”.
6 - 23
Issue 5.0
SECTION 8
UNIVERGE SV8100
MUSIC SOURCES
8.1
Music on Hold
The system can provide Music on Hold from either an internally synthesized
source on the CD-CP00 or from an external source. The external MOH can be
a tuner, tape deck, CD player, etc. The settings in Program 10-04-01 and
14-08-01 determine whether the source for MOH is internal or external.
In addition to a connector on the CD-CP00, the PGD(2)-U10 ADPs also
provide connections for external MOH sources. When using external music
sources for external MOH, programming determines the MOH source for each
trunk.
The CD-CP00 provides a dry relay that activates when a call is placed on
Hold. When an external MOH source is connected to the MOH relay and a call
is placed on Hold, the MOH relay is activated. This allows an external relay
sensor/power supply to turn on the MOH source.
This arrangement allows the MOH source (e.g., a tape deck) to run only when
a call is placed on Hold. The maximum applied voltage for the relay is 24vDC
at 0.5A (the relays are normally open and close when a call is put on hold).
8.2
Installing External Music on Hold
To connect to the CD-CP00
1.
Connect an RCA line from the CN8 or CN9 connector on the CD-CP00
to the appropriate location on the extension cross-connect block.
2.
Connect the two-conductor station cable from the cross-connect block to
the external music source.
3.
Install bridging clips as required.
OR
Connecting to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP:
6 - 24
1.
Make sure the jumper in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP for the channel is set
correctly. (Refer to Figure 6-4 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Jumper Settings on
page 6-4).
2.
If a line cord was not previously connected to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP,
complete Steps 3-6. Otherwise, skip to Step 7.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
3.
Install a modular jack for each PGD(2)-U10 ADP. For each module, run
one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the cross-connect block to a
modular jack. Ground the unused pair.
4.
Terminate the extension leads to GRN/RED of the modular jack.
Terminate the unused leads to the jack.
5.
Install bridging clips as required.
6.
Plug a modular line cord from the mod jack to the CN1 connector on the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
7.
Connect an RCA jack to the audio output(s) on the back of the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
8.
The opposite end of this cable is connected to the external music source
either directly or by connecting to the cross-connect block where the
music source is connected.
Figure 6-16 CPRU Connections
System Hardware Manual
6 - 25
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 6-17 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Connections
6 - 26
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 9
Issue 5.0
NIGHT MODE SELECTION
9.1
Night Mode Selector Switch
The Night Mode Switch relay closes when the system detects either an open
or closure on the MISC block NIGHT SW terminals. Maximum 48v DC is
output to the switch when open, and 7mA DC when shorted.
9.2
SECTION 10
Connecting a Night Mode Selector Switch
1.
Configure PRG12-01-03 to define the Night Mode the system will use
when the switch is closed.
2.
Configure PRG12-01-04 to define the General Purpose relay to be used
as the switching relay.
3.
Connect the night switch mechanism to the appropriate PGD circuit set
as General Purpose Relay in PRG10-05.
TELEPHONE LABELING
10.1
DESI Printer Sheets
Telephones can be easily labeled by removing the plastic faceplate. These
labels can be printed by hand, typewriter, or printing DESI labels. Labels for
this are on 8 1/2 x 11” paper, which allows for easy printing by any printer – dot
matrix, laser, etc.
DESI Printer Sheets are available for the following:
Š
Economy 2E – DESI ITL/DTL-2E (25 PKG)
Š
Economy 6DE – DESI ITL/DTL-6DE (25 PKG)
Š
All Value Telephones – DESI ITL/DTL-12D/24D (25 PKG)
Š
8LK – DESI ITL/DTL 8LK (25 PKG)
Š
60 DSS – DESI DCL-60 (25 PKG)
Š
Clear Side Panel – DESI ITL/DTL-SIDE (25 PKG)
Š
LCD Value, Clear Side – DESI ITL/DTL-SIDE-LCDV (25 PKG)
System Hardware Manual
6 - 27
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
10.1.1
Removing the Faceplate
1.
Use the small notch at the lower right corner of the telephone,
to lift the faceplate up.
Š
Each corner has a plastic locking pin which releases as
the faceplate is lifted up.
Figure 6-18 Removing the Faceplate
10.1.2
6 - 28
Replacing the Faceplate
1.
Place the faceplate back on the telephone.
2.
At each corner, press the locking pin back into place.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 11
Issue 5.0
TELEPHONE ADAPTERS
11.1
Using Adapters
The modular terminals can support the installation of one additional adapter
underneath the terminal. These adapters provide the keyset different
capabilities, depending on the adapter installed.
Figure 6-19 Installing Adapters
Š
These optional adapters are not installed on non-modular telephones.
Š
Only the ILPA, ADA and PSA Adapters can be used on the IP phones.
Š
ADA – Conversation Recording
Š
APR – Analog Port Adapter with Ringer
Š
PSA – Keyset/IP Phone Power Failure
When installing or removing the adapter, the keyset should first be unplugged
from the system. External power is not required for the adapter.
Telephones with any adapters installed require an optional wall mount unit
(WM-L) to be wall mounted. The bracket does not accommodate the
adapter(s).
11.2
In-line Power Adapter (ILPA-R)
The In-Line Power Adapter (ILPA-R), which is IEEE 802.3af compliant, detects
power from a PoE-compatible ethernet switch and passes it to the IP terminal.
The ILPA does the negotiation and detection with the switch and then relays
the power to the IP terminal device. This provides an additional way to power
the NEC IP terminals. With this adapter, the IP terminals on the UNIVERGE
SV8100 system can be powered using:
Š
System Hardware Manual
Local power connecting the IP terminal to a local AC wall outlet using the
AC-R Adapter
6 - 29
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Š
NEC power supply PoE-managed switch (BlueFire 200/24) (in-line and
spare pair detection)
Š
Router Blade (spare pair detection)
Š
Cisco Data Switch – CDP supported (in-line and spare pair detection)
Š
In-Line Power Adapter
Figure 6-20 In-Line Power Adapter
11.2.1
6 - 30
Conditions
Š
Only IP telephones supported by center feed can be used.
Š
This adapter cannot be used with the H.323 telephones.
Š
When center feed is used, unplug the adapter from the
ethernet switch before changing the SW1 setting on the back of
the adapter.
Š
The ILPA-R adapter is intended for use with IP phones and IP
Adapters. Installing any other device into the telephone port of
the ILPA-R may result in damage to the device.
Š
When powering an IP phone using an ILPA-R adapter, the
phone should not get connected to a port on the Router Blade.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
When using center feed, set the SW1 switch located on the back of
the adapter as follows:
Figure 6-21 In-Line Power Adapter Switch Settings
Center Feed Hub System
11.2.2
IEEE802.3af STD System
1
Cisco Discovery Protocol System
1
NEC BlueFire 200/24 Switch
2
Installation
1.
Set the SW1 switch on the ILPA-R adapter to the correct
setting for the ethernet switch to which it is to be connected.
Center Feed Hub System
2.
SW1 Setting
IEEE802.3af STD System
1
Cisco Discovery Protocol System
1
NEC BlueFire 200/24 Switch
2
Set the switch setting on the NEC IPhone or IP adapter to the
correct position.
IPhone (SW2) or IP Adapter (SW1)
System Hardware Manual
SW1 Setting
SW Setting
NEC Power Patch Panel
(12 port NEC SN1604 PWRMS,
24 port NEC BlueFire 200/24)
8SHUBU Blade
1
Cisco Catalyst Power Patch Panel
Cisco Catalyst PRW Series
2
6 - 31
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
4.
Connect the NEC VoIP telephone to the TEL connector on the
ILPA-R adapter with the LAN cable provided with the adapter.
Š
If a customer-provided cable is used, the total length from
the switch to the telephone should be less than 328 feet.
Š
The adapter can be positioned either closer to the keyset
or switch – it does not matter.
Connect a cross-over LAN cable to the LAN connector on the
ILPA-R adapter. Plug the opposite end into the switch which is
to provide power to the telephone. Refer to Figure 6-22 NEC
Terminal Connection to an IEEE 802.3af PoE Switch.
Š
If a straight-through cable is used, NIC Auto Detection
must be enabled in Programs 10-12-05 (CD-CP00), 8405-02 (VOIPU) or 85-01-03 (SHUBU).
Figure 6-22 NEC Terminal Connection to an IEEE 802.3af PoE Switch
6 - 32
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
11.3
Issue 5.0
ADA-L UNIT
Using the ADA-L UNIT (Ancillary Device Adapter) provides a recording jack
connection from a telephone to an external tape recorder, speaker or PC. Both
sides of the conversation are recorded. The adapter output is a 1/8” audio
(mono) jack which you can connect directly to an AUX level input on a
recorder or page amplifier.
Recording a conversation (Handset/Headset/Hands-free), or sending
recorded calls to a telephone are possible by connecting a cassette recorder
to the ADA-L UNIT (voice recording and the playback of a recorded sound
from a cassette recorder cannot occur at the same time).
When installing or removing the adapters, the keyset should be unplugged
from the system.
Be sure the connected audio device provides a standard
AUX level input.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to
eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record telephone
conversation or other sound activities, whether or not
contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in
certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal
advice should be sought prior to implementing any
practice that monitors or records any telephone
conversation. Some federal and state laws require some
form of notification to all parties to a telephone
conversation, such as using a beep tone or other
notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties
to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or
recording the telephone conversation. Some of these laws
incorporate strict penalties.
The handset records only when a call is placed or
answered.
System Hardware Manual
6 - 33
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
11.3.1
ADA-L UNIT Switch Settings
Figure 6-23 ADA-L UNIT shows the location of the switches. The dip
switches (DSW) allow a technician to configure the unit for specific
settings.
Due to location, set switches prior to installation of
ADA-L on DTL/ITL multiline terminal.
Figure 6-23 ADA-L UNIT
To provide control to the recorder or to enable/disable the record start warning
tones, refer to Table 6-3 ADA-L Unit Switch Settings.
Table 6-3 ADA-L Unit Switch Settings
Switch
SW1-1
Connects to Multiline Terminal
Connect = Default
SW1-2
Not Used
SW2-1
Sets External Equipment Impedance to 600 Ω
SW2-2
Used for Complex Impedance Devices
(< 30 Ω Input Impedance)
SW1
SW2
6 - 34
Description/Settings
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Table 6-3 ADA-L Unit Switch Settings (Continued)
Switch
Dip
Switches
(DSW)
.
11.3.2
Description/Settings
DSW 1
Output Hook Signal to External Device
On = Output
Off = No Output (Default)
DSW 2
Record Confirmation Tone
On = Tone On
Off = Tone Off (Default)
DSW 3
and
DSW 4
Use T1/T2
On = Disable (Default)
Off = Enable
Do not connect T1 and T2 when DSW switches 3 and 4 are On.
Installing the ADA-L UNIT
Perform the following steps to connect the ADA-L UNIT to the
Bottom Option Interface located underneath the DTL/ITL multiline
terminal.
.
Only one ADA-L UNIT can be installed at a time.
To prevent possible damage to the ADA-L
UNIT or the DTL/ITL multiline terminal
during installation or removal, disconnect
the line cord/LAN cable and the AC/DC
adapter from the DTL/ITL multiline terminal.
1.
Unplug the line cord from the keyset.
2.
Turn the DTL/ITL multiline terminal upside down.
3.
Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 6-24
Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support).
Stoppers
Tilt Leg
Figure 6-24 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support
System Hardware Manual
6 - 35
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Push the two stopper tabs through the slots to separate the tilt
leg from the leg support.
5.
Lay the tilt leg and the leg support flat to expose ADA-L UNIT
compartment.
6.
Carefully pry loose the knockout covering the bottom option
interface (refer to Figure 6-25 Bottom Option Interface
Knockout).
Knockout
Bottom Option
Interface
Figure 6-25 Bottom Option Interface Knockout
7.
Using the exposed Bottom Option Interface as a guide, install
the ADA-L UNIT in the bottom of the DTL/ITL multiline terminal.
Push down until left and right tabs are seated (Refer to Figure
6-26 Install ADA-L UNIT).
Tab
Tab
Bottom Option
Interface
Figure 6-26 Install ADA-L UNIT
6 - 36
8.
Return tilt leg to original position.
9.
Reconnect all cables previously disconnected.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
11.3.3
ADA-L UNIT Connection
The mini-plug connection cord should not use an
attenuator and have a monaural (single ring)
mini-plug connection for normal recording.
11.3.3.1
ADA-L UNIT Connection for Recording Only
1.
Set the ADA-L UNIT DSW switches (Refer to Figure
6-23 ADA-L UNIT on page 6-34).
Š
Š
Š
2.
Set DSW 6 to ON.
When using the LINE IN jack
on a cassette recorder for
recording, set DSW switch 5 to
OFF.
When using the MIC jack on a
cassette recorder, set DSW
switch 5 to ON.
Using the mini-plug connection cord, connect the
the ADA-L Unit Out jack to the cassette recorder
MIC jack (Refer to Figure 6-27 ADA-L OUT Jack
Connection).
Figure 6-27 ADA-L OUT Jack Connection
System Hardware Manual
6 - 37
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
11.3.3.2
ADA-L UNIT Connection for Sending Recorded Calls to
the Telephone
1.
Set the ADA-L UNIT DSW switches (see Figure
6-23 ADA-L UNIT on page 6-34).
Š
Š
2.
Set DSW 6 to ON.
When sending recorded calls
to the telephone, set DSW
switch 1 to ON.
Using the mini-plug connection cord, connect the
the ADA-L Unit IN jack to the cassette recorder EAR
PHONE jack (Refer to Figure 6-28 ADA-L IN Jack
Connection).
Figure 6-28 ADA-L IN Jack Connection
11.4
APR-L UNIT
The APR-L UNIT (Analog Port Ringer) provides an analog interface for the
DTL terminal. The APR-L UNIT adapter provides ringing which allows the
connected device to be used for incoming and outgoing calls. This adapter
also provides a separate extension number for the analog device, which
allows both devices to be used at the same time (this can be removed in
system programming if you wish). One terminal can have an APR-L UNIT
adapter.
The maximum distance between the APR-L UNIT and the analog terminal is
49 feet.
With the APR-L UNIT adapter installed, and the analog device attached to the
adapter is in use, the telephone cannot be used as there is only one physical
port number assigned to the telephone. If both the analog device and
telephone are picked up at the same time, the analog device takes priority. If
the terminal user is on a call and the single line telephone is picked up, the
single line telephone takes the call from the terminal user.
6 - 38
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
When installing or removing the adapters, the telephone should be
unplugged from the system.
If it is the intention to use the APR-L UNIT to
connect to a fax machine, it should be noted
that the APR-L UNIT provides 24v and some
fax machines require 48v to operate correctly.
The APR-L UNIT supports reverse-polarity, message waiting lamping, or
Caller ID.
.
Note: if the APR-L unit is configured with the same extension extension number as the
DTL multiline terminal to which it is installed, timers relating to SLT inerfaces,
including Timed Break Recall, do not effect the APR-L Unit.
11.4.1
APR-L UNIT Switch Settings
Figure 6-29 APR-L UNIT shows the location of the switches. The dip
switches (DSW) allow a technician to configure the unit for specific
settings.
Due to location, set the switches prior to installation
of APR-L on DTL multiline terminal.
ANALOG PORT
Figure 6-29 APR-L UNIT
Set the dip switches on the APR adapter to the required position.
System Hardware Manual
1.
Leave the SW1 switch at its factory setting of 1. This also
applies to the dip switch settings (1 and 5 = on; 2-4, 6-8 = off).
2.
Use the SW3 switch to set the terminating impedance. Position
1 is for a pure resistance of 600 ohms; position 2 is for complex
6 - 39
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
impedance (factory setting is 1).
11.4.2
Installing the APR-L UNIT
Perform the following to connect the APR-L UNIT to the Bottom
Option Interface located underneath the DTL multiline terminal.
.
Only one APR-L UNIT can be installed.
To prevent possible damage to the APR-L
UNIT or the DTL multiline terminal during
installation or removal, disconnect the line
cord and the AC/DC adapter from the DTL
multiline terminal.
1.
Unplug the line cord from the keyset.
2.
Turn the DTL multiline terminal upside down.
3.
Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 6-30
Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support).
Stoppers
Tilt Leg
Figure 6-30 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support
6 - 40
4.
Push the two stopper tabs through the slots to separate the tilt
leg from the leg support.
5.
Lay the tilt leg and the leg support flat to expose APR-L UNIT
compartment.
6.
Carefully pry loose the knockout covering the bottom option
interface (refer to Figure 6-31 Bottom Option Interface
Knockout on page 6-41).
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Bottom Option
Interface
Knockout
Figure 6-31 Bottom Option Interface Knockout
7.
Using the exposed Bottom Option Interface as a guide, install
the APR-L UNIT in the bottom of the DTL multiline terminal.
Push down until left and right tabs are seated (Refer to Figure
6-32 Install APR-L UNIT).
Tab
Tab
Bottom Option
Interface
Figure 6-32 Install APR-L UNIT
System Hardware Manual
8.
Return tilt leg to original position.
9.
For the APR adapter to be recognized correctly, before
plugging in the keyset, make sure the extension number to be
used for the adapter is undefined in Program 10-03-01.
10.
Plug the line cord back into the keyset.
11.
Using the ferrite bead that was included with the APR Adapter,
wrap the line cord once through the ferrite bead and snap it
shut (refer to Figure 6-33 Ferrite Bead with APR Adapter on
page 6-42).
6 - 41
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 6-33 Ferrite Bead with APR Adapter
12.
Plug the end of the line cord for the analog device which has
the ferrite bead closest to it into the jack on the adapter.
Connect the opposite end to the analog device.
Before removing the adapter, to avoid any
hardware problems, unplug the line cord, then
any other adapter cables.
13.
To determine the APR analog extension number. . .
10-03-04 : Optional Installed Unit 1
Displays the type of terminal installed. This can be used to
verify that the system recognizes the adapter.
10-03-06 : Blade Setup
Assign the terminal type (12) for the telephone channel, which
has the APR Adapter installed.
When you want the APR to use the same extension number as
the telephone to which it is attached, remove the terminal type
in this option. With this setup, when the analog device is in use,
it busies out the terminal as there is no separate port number
assigned for the adapter. To reverse this, and allow the APR to
have its own extension number, reassign the terminal type (12)
in this option.
10-03-07 : Blade Setup
The port number of the APR Adapter is displayed for the
extension (APR ports = 193-256 with all software through
3.07). The ports are assigned from the highest available port
down.
Refer to Section 5: Data and SMDR for additional details.
6 - 42
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
11.5
Issue 5.0
PSA-L (BK) UNIT / PSA-L (WH) UNIT
The PSA-L UNIT (Power Save Adapter), an optional adapter for the ITL/DTL
Terminals, is used with IP telephones to make or receive a call using the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) when a call cannot be made or
received using the Local Area Network (LAN). When a power failure occurs,
the IP telephone is automatically switched to the PSTN. When power is
restored, the IP telephone restarts and connects to the network unless a
conversation is in progress on PSTN. The PSTN call must be completed by
going on-hook before the connection to the LAN is restored. The unit features:
Š
Survivability in case of power failure or network congestion.
Š
Support on modular terminals (ITL/DTL)
Š
PSTN Type = analog PSTN
Š
Dial method – MF/DF (10pps)
The PSA should not relied upon as the sole means
of providing contact with Emergency services in
the event of a power failure or communication
loss with the main SV8100 system
PSTN
LED
User System/PSTN
Switch
Volume Control
Figure 6-34 PSA-L UNIT
System Hardware Manual
6 - 43
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
PSTN
DTMF/DP
Figure 6-35 PSA-L UNIT Connections
11.5.1
Installing the PSA-L Adapter
Before installing or removing the PSA-L
adapter, remove the line cord, LAN cable, and
then AC adapter from the outlet.
1.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
2.
Unplug the line cord and handset cord from the keyset.
.
3.
6 - 44
Only one PSA-L UNIT can be attached to the DTL/ITL multiline
terminal.
Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 6-36
Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support on page 6-45).
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Stoppers
Tilt Leg
Figure 6-36 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support
4.
Push the two stopper tabs through the slots to separate the tilt
leg from the leg support.
5.
Lay the tilt leg and the leg support flat.
6.
Press the two tabs locking the legs to the multiline terminal and
pull the legs toward you, lifting to remove.
Figure 6-37 Remove Legs From Multiline Terminal
7.
System Hardware Manual
Disconnect serial connection cord from terminal body. Leave
cord connected to the cradle unit.
6 - 45
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
8.
Push latch to right to unlock the cradle unit. Then push the
cradle unit forward to separate from the terminal body.
Latch
Figure 6-38 Bottom of Multiline Terminal (Legs Removed)
9.
Fit the projections on the side of the PSA-L UNIT into the guide
holes on the side of the terminal and pull toward you until the
PSA-L UNIT snaps into place.
Figure 6-39 Attach PSA-L Unit to the Multiline Terminal
6 - 46
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
10.
Gently press the serial cable into the grooved cutout for the
cable.
Cable Groove
Figure 6-40 Grooved Cutout for Serial Cable
11.
Connect the serial connection cord (refer to Figure 6-39 Attach
PSA-L Unit to the Multiline Terminal on page 6-46) from the
PSA-L UNIT to the terminal body.
12.
Open the Dip Switch Cover (refer to Figure 6-35 PSA-L UNIT
Connections on page 6-44). Set the dip switch on the PSA-L
adapter to the required position. Close the cover.
13.
If using the handset, place the stopper in the tilt leg.
Figure 6-41 Insert Stopper for Handset Use
System Hardware Manual
6 - 47
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
14.
For the Handset, set the connector in place.
Figure 6-42 Insert Connector for Handset Use
15.
Attach the analog trunk cable and the handset cable. Refer to
Figure 6-35 PSA-L UNIT Connections on page 6-44.
16.
Reinstall the legs, pushing upwards until both locks snap into
place.
17.
Return tilt leg to desired position.
18.
Return the multiline terminal to the numbered keypad in the up
position.
19.
Connect the Line cord, the PSTN cable and the Handset cord
(if used).
20.
Remove both plastic panels from the front of the multiline
terminal.
Figure 6-43 Remove Plastic Panels
6 - 48
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
21.
Pull tab down and lift out the numbered keypad panel.
Figure 6-44 Remove Numbered Keypad
22.
Install the new keypad panel supplied with the PSA-L UNIT.
Figure 6-45 Install Numbered Keypad
23.
System Hardware Manual
Reinstall both plastic panels to the front of the multiline terminal
(refer to Figure 6-46 Install Plastic Panels on page 6-50).
6 - 49
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 6-46 Install Plastic Panels
11.5.2
24.
Connect the line cord to the adapter.
25.
Connect the user system (KTS or PBX) cable.
26.
If required, remove the side panel from the original cradle unit.
Using the PSA-L Adapter
CAUTION: Before installing or removing the
PSA-L adapter, remove the line cord, LAN cable,
and then AC adapter from the outlet.
1.
Placing Calls:
When the PSTN line is activated either manually by the switch
or due to a power failure, use the dial pad buttons (0-9, *, #) to
place an outside call. Use the Vol × or Ø to increase or
decrease audio levels.
Š
6 - 50
Other than receiving calls, no other keyset functions are
available.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
2.
3.
Answering Calls:
Š
If you receive a call via PSTN during a conversation via
LAN, answer the call by completing the LAN call and
placing the handset back into the cradle. Change the
LAN/PSTN Change Switch to PSTN and then lift the
handset to answer the call. If you change the LAN/PSTN
Change Switch to the PSTN position while talking via
LAN, the LAN call is disconnected.
Š
Other than receiving calls, no other terminal functions are
available.
Adjusting the Ring Volume
Use the Volume Control Switch located on the PSA-L adapter
to adjust through the three available volume levels.
Š
4.
When Power is Restored
The IP keyset restarts and reconnects to the network LAN.
However, if you are on a PSTN call when the power is restored,
your conversation continues until the handset is placed in the
cradle. Once this occurs, the IP terminal restarts and
reconnects to the LAN.
Š
11.6
Other than receiving calls, no other terminal functions are
available.
Other than receiving calls, no other terminal functions are
available.
Gigabit Adapter (GBA-L UNIT)
The GBA-L UNIT enables IP telephones (DT730/DT750) to operate in a
Gigabit Ethernet environment. A single Gigabit Ethernet desktop drop
provides a 10/100Mbps to the IP telephone and a gigabit connection to a
personal computer. The Gigabit Adapter is installed on the bottom of the IP
telephone and offers a gigabit interface to the LAN side and PC port. The
Gigabit Adapter is powered by PoE or can operate off of local power.
System Hardware Manual
6 - 51
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 6-47 GBA-L UNIT
11.6.1
Installing the GBA-L UNIT
Before installing or removing the GBA-L
UNIT, remove the line cord, LAN cable, and
then AC adapter from the outlet.
1.
Turn multiline terminal upside down.
2.
Unplug the line cord and handset cord from the multiline
terminal.
.
3.
6 - 52
Only one GBA-L UNIT can be attached to the DTL/ITL multiline
terminal.
Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 6-48
Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support on page 6-53).
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Stoppers
Tilt Leg
Figure 6-48 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support
4.
Push the two stopper tabs through the slots to separate the tilt
leg from the leg support.
5.
Lay the tilt leg and the leg support flat.
6.
Press the two tabs locking the legs to the multiline terminal and
pull the legs toward you, lifting to remove.
Figure 6-49 Remove Legs From Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
6 - 53
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
7.
Plug in the LAN cable and gently press the cable into the
grooved cutout (refer to Figure 6-50 Attach the LAN Cable).
Figure 6-50 Attach the LAN Cable
8.
Plug in the DC power cable and gently press the cable into the
grooved cutout (refer to Figure 6-51 Attach the DC Power
Cable).
Figure 6-51 Attach the DC Power Cable
6 - 54
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
9.
Assemble the legs and bracket then align with tab holes (refer
to Figure 6-52 Align Bracket with Terminal).
Figure 6-52 Align Bracket with Terminal
10.
Pass the LAN and DC power cables through the bracket (refer
to Figure 6-53 Pass Cabling Through Bracket).
Figure 6-53 Pass Cabling Through Bracket
System Hardware Manual
6 - 55
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
11.
Slide the supporting bracket forward until a click is heard (refer
to Figure 6-54 Secure Bracket to Terminal).
Figure 6-54 Secure Bracket to Terminal
12.
Secure base of GBA-L UNIT to bracket assembly (refer to
Figure 6-55 Secure GBA-L UNIT Base to Bracket Assembly).
Figure 6-55 Secure GBA-L UNIT Base to Bracket Assembly
6 - 56
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
13.
Install the NEC provided Cat 5 Ethernet cable (refer to Figure
6-56 IP Phone(X) Connection).
Figure 6-56 IP Phone(X) Connection
14.
Install the NEC provided Cat 5 Ethernet cable (refer to Figure
6-57 PC(X) Connection).
Figure 6-57 PC(X) Connection
System Hardware Manual
6 - 57
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
15.
Install the NEC provided power cable (refer to Figure 6-58 DC
Power Connection).
Figure 6-58 DC Power Connection
16.
Connect the Core then plug in the Network connection cable
(refer to Figure 6-59 LAN(=) Connection).
Figure 6-59 LAN(=) Connection
6 - 58
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
17.
Install the cable from the optional external AC adapter (refer to
Figure 6-60 AC to DC In Connection).
Figure 6-60 AC to DC In Connection
.
18.
The AC Adapter (AC-L UNIT) must be ordered separately.
Cable installation for the GBA-L UNIT complete (refer to Figure
6-61 GBA-L UNIT Installed).
Figure 6-61 GBA-L UNIT Installed
System Hardware Manual
6 - 59
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
11.6.2
GBA-L UNIT Connection
The following chart outlines the connectivity available to the GBA-L
UNIT:
Figure 6-62 GBA-L UNIT Connectivity Chart
11.6.3
LED Display
The following provides a list of each LED and associated operation
and status indications. Refer to Figure 6-63 GBA-L UNIT LED
Display on page 6-61 for the location of the LEDs on the GBA-L
UNIT.
6 - 60
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
LED Name
When 1000Mbps is
Connected
When 100Mbps is
Connected
When 10Mbps is
Connected
SPEED Display
Green Lighting
Red Lighting
Turning Off
LED Name
At LINK
ACT
(At the Data Communication)
LINK/ACT Display
Green Lighting
Green Blinking
Figure 6-63 GBA-L UNIT LED Display
SECTION 12
POWER FAILURE TELEPHONES
12.1
Power Failure
The system allows connection for basic telephone service during a power
failure. The power failure operation occurs during a commercial power failure,
and is not affected by blade failure. Power Failure Transfer is provided by
connecting to the CD-4COTA blade.
The CD-4COTA Blade provides 2 Power Failure Transfer circuits.
The CN3 and CN5 connectors each provide connection to four analog trunk
ports, which are polarity sensitive (tip to tip, ring to ring). The power
failure circuits, however, are not polarity sensitive. A maximum of 15
CD-4COTA blades per system is allowed.
System Hardware Manual
6 - 61
Issue 5.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
When connecting the RJ-61 cables to the COIU Blade,
note the position of the Power Failure connector. Do not
confuse connector CN3 as the CN2 trunk connector.
12.2
Connector Pin-Outs on COIU Blade for Power Failure Circuits
Table 6-4 RJ-61 Cable Connector
RJ-61 Cable Connector - CN13, SLT Interface for Power Failure
12.3
6 - 62
Pin No.
Connection
1
–
2
–
3
Circuit 2 - Tip
4
Circuit 1 - Ring
5
Circuit 1 - Tip
6
Circuit 2 - Ring
7
–
8
–
Installing the Power Failure Telephones
1.
Connect an RJ-61 connector to the COIU Blade installed in the system.
2.
Install a modular jack for each single line telephone supporting PF
operation. The modular jack should be within six feet of the phone.
3.
For each extension, run one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the crossconnect block to a modular jack.
4.
Terminate the extension leads to GRN/RED of the modular jack.
Terminate the unused leads to the jack. Refer to Figure 6-64 Power
Failure Connector (CN3) Shown on CD-4COTA Blade on page 6-63.
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 5.0
Figure 6-64 Power Failure Connector (CN3) Shown on CD-4COTA Blade
System Hardware Manual
6 - 63
Issue 5.0
6 - 64
UNIVERGE SV8100
Installing SV8100 Optional Equipment
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
NEC reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at any time
without notice.
NEC has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The
information contained herein is the property of NEC and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval of NEC .
Dterm, NEAX and UNIVERGE are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation. Windows
is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. AT&T is a registered trademark of
AT&T Wireless Services, Inc. Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All other brand
names and product names referenced in this document are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright 2010
NEC Unified Solutions
Anton Philipsweg 1
1223 KZ Hilversum
The Netherlands
www.nec-unified.com
NEC Unified Solutions
Issue 5.0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement